PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages - User contributions [en]

Template:Note

2014-08-15T12:11:34Z

Mike Ross:

{| style="background:#D4FFD4; color:#002AFF" border="0" cellpadding="5" width="100%"
|-
|[[Image:GeekNotesIcon.png|50px]]||'''Note:''' {{{1}}}
|}

Main Page

2014-08-15T11:42:57Z

Mike Ross:

{| class="wikitable" border="0" width=100% cellpadding="20"
|- style="height: 80px;"
| bgcolor="#01815E"|'''Overland Park Project Procedures Manual'''
|}
{{Navbar}}

== Overview ==

[[Introduction]]

[[List of Initials and Acronyms]]

[[Project Development Procedures for Non-NHS Projects - Checklist]]

[[Revision History]]

[[References]]

[[RightsNotice|'''Obtaining Editor rights on this Wiki''']][[Image:Editor.jpg|80px]]

== Phases ==

[[Phase I - Vision]]

[[Phase II - Preliminary Design]]

[[Phase III - Final Design]]

[[Phase IV - Pre-Construction]]

[[Phase V - Construction]]

[[Phase VI - Retrospect]]

Consult the [http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software.
== Supplemental Information ==
[[Preapproved_Materials|'''Approved Materials List''']]

'''[[Traffic Sign Design Guidelines]]'''

== Special Pages ==
[[Special:ListFiles|File Listing]]

[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wikipedia.php Page to convert Excel to Mediawiki table format]

== Getting started ==
* [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list]
* [http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ]
* [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]

Parking Prohibition / Permissive Parking Sign Design Guidelines

2014-07-30T15:49:43Z

Mike Ross: /* City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: */

'''City Guideline Regarding the Installation of "Parking Prohibition" or “Permissive Parking” (R7 and R8 Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

Governing Document Reference:
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition], [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf City Resolution 4037 Section E] and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, Article XIII, Section 12.04.083 through Section 12.04.102].

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
"No Parking" (R7 and R8 Series) signs, by the MUTCD, are intended for use to establish parking restrictions according to State law and the City of Overland Park Municipal Code.

Parking signs should display the following information from top to bottom of the sign, in the order listed: 
:A. The restriction or prohibition; 
:B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not at all hours; and 
:C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day. 
[[File:R7 Series Parking Restriction Signs.JPG|left]][[File:R7-108.JPG|next]] 

If the parking restriction applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the restriction should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right and left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective restrictions apply.

As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, word messages such as BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, THIS SIDE OF SIGN, or BETWEEN SIGNS may be used.

== Background: ==
These guidelines are meant to create consistency within the city limits of the City of Overland Park in the installation and enforcement of parking control signs on City streets (Residential, Collector, Super Collector and Thoroughfare) and City parking lots. Its purpose is to provide a safe passageway for motorists by providing clear and consistent information.

The goal of these guidelines is to create a standard for which parking control will be consistent for same street classifications throughout the City. However, due to varying types of unforeseen safety issues, the City Traffic Engineer shall have authority to install parking control, which varies from the standard.

===Design Criteria:===
These guidelines were established using the following criteria as reference:
# Assume 1'-6" of a 2'-0" curb and gutter is usable for parking. 
# Assume a typical passenger car width of 7'-0". 
# Assume a snow plow Truck width of 10'-0". 
# Assume a fire truck requires a 10’-0” travel width and a minimum of 19'-0" with the outriggers extended. 

===Definitions:===
# Roadway Width - Measured from back of curb to back of curb, or edge of pavement to edge of pavement where no curb exists. Approximately eighteen inches of a two foot curb and gutter cross-section can be utilized when parking a vehicle on the road. Therefore, as an example, a 28' back to back street has 27' of usable roadway. 
# Road Segment Length - A typical block, from cross street to cross street, except in the cases of group mailboxes, fire hydrants, traffic calming measures, etc. 
# Sign Spacing - Based on the height of the No Parking Symbol of 9 inches, the maximum spacing between consecutive signs is 270 feet. This is in keeping with the MUTCD to provide 1” of letter height for every 30 feet of visibility distance. [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|(Appendix A)]] 
# Enforceable Limitations - Any location signed using the R8-3 signs should be considered as No Parking up to an installed R8-3 (L) or R8-3 (R) sign. If no termination signs exist, the parking restriction should be considered terminated at the intersection of the next cross street.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
===Residential Streets:===
====New Residential Street Construction:====
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 26’ or greater, parking is allowed on both sides of the roadway. Safety issues shall dictate any variances to this policy.
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 22’ or 24’, parking is only allowed on one side of the roadway. The side of the street upon which parking shall be restricted will be based on sidewalk location, mail box locations, or other safety considerations such as adjacent parks, schools, etc.

====Existing Residential Streets:====
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets, or curbed and guttered streets with a width less than 26’ back of curb to back of curb, parking restrictions will be posted on one side of the street. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident the City may restrict parking on both sides of the street.
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets or curbed and guttered streets that meet or exceed the standard width of 26' back of curb to back of curb, the posting of parking restrictions will be on a case by case basis. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident, the City will install signs that best address the situation. Otherwise a petition must be signed by the residents. Where a Homes Association (or another such group which represents the residents) exists, a letter from this group can serve in place of a petition.
# Once an unimproved street is improved in conjunction with the City’s Neighborhood Streets Reconstruction Program, or any similar program, all “No Parking” signs that were existing prior to the improvement, will be removed where the improved street meets the requirements for New Construction, item 1 above. Residents wishing to have the signs reinstalled will be required to go through the petitioning process. Exception to this rule applies if a traffic study conducted during the design phase indicates that there is a need to keep the signs in place.

====Signing Petition Process:====
# Upon a request being submitted, a field investigation shall be initiated to determine whether the installation of "No Parking" sign(s) conform to this policy and will be enforceable under section 12.04 of the Overland Park Traffic Ordinance.
# When a petition is used it must be submitted by the requester with approval of over half of the homeowners who live along the affected street segment.
# The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved petition form to the requestor (see the attached form) listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.
::a. The petition will state, based on a City staff field investigation, the side of the street that the parking restriction will affect.
::b. The requestor shall circulate the petition to the addresses on the petition for the homeowner (one signature per household is all that will be accepted) to vote in either favor or against the parking restrictions. The petition must be approved by over half of the homeowners along any affected street.
::c. City staff will notify citizens at addresses on the returned petition that do not have a homeowner’s signature informing them that there has been a request for parking restrictions. They will be given the opportunity to vote in favor or against the restrictions, unless the petition receives a majority vote without their signature.

Collector Streets: 
Parking may be restricted upon an engineering study for specific circumstances as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. This includes areas near schools, parks, bicycle routes, or other similar traffic generators with sufficient on-site parking.

Thoroughfare and Super Collector Streets: 
Parking is prohibited on all thoroughfare streets, except within the downtown Overland Park District as outlined below. Parking is also prohibited on super collector streets.

Downtown District: 
# On-street parking in the downtown Overland Park district shall be limited to 2 or 3-hour parking unless otherwise posted as short-term (5 or 15 minute) parking as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.
# The following streets have been identified as falling within the Downtown District: Santa Fe Drive between 79th Street and Conser Street; 80th Street between Metcalf Avenue and Conser Street: Conser from Santa Fe to 79th: 79th St from Conser to Metcalf.

Other Typical Applications: 
The following applications are typical and do not reflect all possible situations where parking control may be needed. See [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|Appendix A]] for typical sign location applications and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Section 12.04.085 of the Overland Park Municipal Code] for a complete listing of enforceable parking control situations:
# Fire hydrants – On-street parking shall be restricted fifteen (15) feet on either side of the Fire hydrant.
# Crosswalks – Parking shall be restricted within twenty (20) feet of a crosswalk at an intersection twenty (20) feet on either side of a mid-block crosswalk.
# Intersections – Parking shall be restricted within thirty (30) feet upon the approach to any flashing signal, stop sign, or traffic control signal located at the side of a roadway.
# Group mailboxes – Parking shall be restricted ten (10) feet on either side of the mailboxes.
# Streets with curb side mailboxes – Residential streets, which qualify for parking restrictions, and have residential mailboxes installed along the curb on one side of the street, should have the signs installed on the same side as the mailboxes to ensure un-interrupted delivery of mail.
# Streets with sidewalk on one side – Where there are residential streets that qualify for parking restrictions, and there is sidewalk on one side of the street, the side opposite of the sidewalk should have the parking restrictions installed. The mailbox rule above should take precedence when there is a conflict between these two applications.
# Residential Areas – In addition to the policy on residential street widths discussed above, parking control may be required in residential areas affected by, but not limited to bordering schools, parks and businesses. In all instances, a traffic study will be conducted and if deemed necessary, a parking petition must be circulated and approved by over half of the owners along any affected street.
# Schools – Schools will be signed on a case by case basis as indicated by a traffic study. Generally, signs and plaques may be installed indicating “No Stopping or Standing”, or “No Parking”, and may further specify times of the day and days of the week when effective. Refer to signing standards for typical signs that will be installed in this situation.

Requests to Temporarily Cover Parking Restriction Signs: 
Exceptions to the above requirements may exist, or be granted, for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs for a short-term duration. In any such case where a request has been made and approved by the City Traffic Engineer to temporarily cover the signs, it is up to the requestor to cover the sign prior to the event as well as to uncover the signs immediately following the event. City staff will notify the Administrative Assistant of the Traffic Services Division who will in turn notify the Overland Park Police Department, and the Traffic Services Maintenance Department of the approved request.

The requestor shall not be allowed to cover any signs prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers must be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event. In the event that these timeframes are not adhered to, future requests from the requestor may not be granted.

The table below is a list of exceptions that have been granted a blanket approval to cover No Parking signs.
{| width="600px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|-
|colspan="2"|Title
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Name'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Location'''
|-
|Milburn Country Club
|Santa Fe Drive (71st Street to 67th Street)
|-
|Family Tree Nursery
|Farley (86th Street to 83rd Terrace) 85th Street (Mastin to Carter)
|-
|Villa Saint Joseph Nursing Home
|Rosewood (119th Street to Tomahawk Creek Parkway

|}
# Where approval has been granted for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs, the City Traffic Maintenance division will install sign coverings based on the timeframe requested. In certain situations, such as over weekends or holidays, the requesting entity may be required to install and remove the coverings.
# The exceptions listed in the chart above have been given sign coverings to install and remove on their own, providing the appropriate granting of permission has been followed.

Petition for the Removal of Parking Restriction Signage 
The removal of Parking restrictions on existing residential streets will go through the same petitioning process as the addition of parking restrictions. Any street which had parking restrictions signs installed as part of the petitioning process must wait twelve (12) months from the initial installation before it can be reviewed for removal of some or all of the parking restriction signs.

== Signing Standards: ==
Sign Colors

"Parking Prohibition" signs 
Where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times, the basic design for parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white retro-reflective background, except that the R8-3 sign shall have a black legend and border and a red circle and slash on a white retro-reflective background.

"Permissive Parking" signs 
Where only limited-time parking or parking in a particular manner are permitted, the signs shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflective background.

"Informational" plaques 
Additional information plaques may be mounted below or incorporated into the “Parking Prohibition” or “Permissive Parking” sign face. The text and border color shall match the color of the sign it supplements and shall be on a white retro-reflective background.

Sign Sizes

“No Parking” signs shall be 12” x 18” vertical rectangles. Additional "Informational" plaques mounted below the sign shall be 12” x 9” horizontal rectangles.

The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:

Parking Prohibition / Permissive Parking Sign Design Guidelines

2014-07-30T15:47:22Z

Mike Ross: /* Background: */

'''City Guideline Regarding the Installation of "Parking Prohibition" or “Permissive Parking” (R7 and R8 Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

Governing Document Reference:
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition], [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf City Resolution 4037 Section E] and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, Article XIII, Section 12.04.083 through Section 12.04.102].

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
"No Parking" (R7 and R8 Series) signs, by the MUTCD, are intended for use to establish parking restrictions according to State law and the City of Overland Park Municipal Code.

Parking signs should display the following information from top to bottom of the sign, in the order listed: 
:A. The restriction or prohibition; 
:B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not at all hours; and 
:C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day. 
[[File:R7 Series Parking Restriction Signs.JPG|left]][[File:R7-108.JPG|next]] 

If the parking restriction applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the restriction should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right and left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective restrictions apply.

As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, word messages such as BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, THIS SIDE OF SIGN, or BETWEEN SIGNS may be used.

== Background: ==
These guidelines are meant to create consistency within the city limits of the City of Overland Park in the installation and enforcement of parking control signs on City streets (Residential, Collector, Super Collector and Thoroughfare) and City parking lots. Its purpose is to provide a safe passageway for motorists by providing clear and consistent information.

The goal of these guidelines is to create a standard for which parking control will be consistent for same street classifications throughout the City. However, due to varying types of unforeseen safety issues, the City Traffic Engineer shall have authority to install parking control, which varies from the standard.

===Design Criteria:===
These guidelines were established using the following criteria as reference:
# Assume 1'-6" of a 2'-0" curb and gutter is usable for parking. 
# Assume a typical passenger car width of 7'-0". 
# Assume a snow plow Truck width of 10'-0". 
# Assume a fire truck requires a 10’-0” travel width and a minimum of 19'-0" with the outriggers extended. 

===Definitions:===
# Roadway Width - Measured from back of curb to back of curb, or edge of pavement to edge of pavement where no curb exists. Approximately eighteen inches of a two foot curb and gutter cross-section can be utilized when parking a vehicle on the road. Therefore, as an example, a 28' back to back street has 27' of usable roadway. 
# Road Segment Length - A typical block, from cross street to cross street, except in the cases of group mailboxes, fire hydrants, traffic calming measures, etc. 
# Sign Spacing - Based on the height of the No Parking Symbol of 9 inches, the maximum spacing between consecutive signs is 270 feet. This is in keeping with the MUTCD to provide 1” of letter height for every 30 feet of visibility distance. [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|(Appendix A)]] 
# Enforceable Limitations - Any location signed using the R8-3 signs should be considered as No Parking up to an installed R8-3 (L) or R8-3 (R) sign. If no termination signs exist, the parking restriction should be considered terminated at the intersection of the next cross street.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Residential Streets: 
New Residential Street Construction:
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 26’ or greater, parking is allowed on both sides of the roadway. Safety issues shall dictate any variances to this policy.
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 22’ or 24’, parking is only allowed on one side of the roadway. The side of the street upon which parking shall be restricted will be based on sidewalk location, mail box locations, or other safety considerations such as adjacent parks, schools, etc.

Existing Residential Streets: 
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets, or curbed and guttered streets with a width less than 26’ back of curb to back of curb, parking restrictions will be posted on one side of the street. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident the City may restrict parking on both sides of the street.
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets or curbed and guttered streets that meet or exceed the standard width of 26' back of curb to back of curb, the posting of parking restrictions will be on a case by case basis. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident, the City will install signs that best address the situation. Otherwise a petition must be signed by the residents. Where a Homes Association (or another such group which represents the residents) exists, a letter from this group can serve in place of a petition.
# Once an unimproved street is improved in conjunction with the City’s Neighborhood Streets Reconstruction Program, or any similar program, all “No Parking” signs that were existing prior to the improvement, will be removed where the improved street meets the requirements for New Construction, item 1 above. Residents wishing to have the signs reinstalled will be required to go through the petitioning process. Exception to this rule applies if a traffic study conducted during the design phase indicates that there is a need to keep the signs in place.

Signing Petition Process:
# Upon a request being submitted, a field investigation shall be initiated to determine whether the installation of "No Parking" sign(s) conform to this policy and will be enforceable under section 12.04 of the Overland Park Traffic Ordinance.
# When a petition is used it must be submitted by the requester with approval of over half of the homeowners who live along the affected street segment.
# The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved petition form to the requestor (see the attached form) listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.
::a. The petition will state, based on a City staff field investigation, the side of the street that the parking restriction will affect.
::b. The requestor shall circulate the petition to the addresses on the petition for the homeowner (one signature per household is all that will be accepted) to vote in either favor or against the parking restrictions. The petition must be approved by over half of the homeowners along any affected street.
::c. City staff will notify citizens at addresses on the returned petition that do not have a homeowner’s signature informing them that there has been a request for parking restrictions. They will be given the opportunity to vote in favor or against the restrictions, unless the petition receives a majority vote without their signature.

Collector Streets: 
Parking may be restricted upon an engineering study for specific circumstances as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. This includes areas near schools, parks, bicycle routes, or other similar traffic generators with sufficient on-site parking.

Thoroughfare and Super Collector Streets: 
Parking is prohibited on all thoroughfare streets, except within the downtown Overland Park District as outlined below. Parking is also prohibited on super collector streets.

Downtown District: 
# On-street parking in the downtown Overland Park district shall be limited to 2 or 3-hour parking unless otherwise posted as short-term (5 or 15 minute) parking as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.
# The following streets have been identified as falling within the Downtown District: Santa Fe Drive between 79th Street and Conser Street; 80th Street between Metcalf Avenue and Conser Street: Conser from Santa Fe to 79th: 79th St from Conser to Metcalf.

Other Typical Applications: 
The following applications are typical and do not reflect all possible situations where parking control may be needed. See [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|Appendix A]] for typical sign location applications and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Section 12.04.085 of the Overland Park Municipal Code] for a complete listing of enforceable parking control situations:
# Fire hydrants – On-street parking shall be restricted fifteen (15) feet on either side of the Fire hydrant.
# Crosswalks – Parking shall be restricted within twenty (20) feet of a crosswalk at an intersection twenty (20) feet on either side of a mid-block crosswalk.
# Intersections – Parking shall be restricted within thirty (30) feet upon the approach to any flashing signal, stop sign, or traffic control signal located at the side of a roadway.
# Group mailboxes – Parking shall be restricted ten (10) feet on either side of the mailboxes.
# Streets with curb side mailboxes – Residential streets, which qualify for parking restrictions, and have residential mailboxes installed along the curb on one side of the street, should have the signs installed on the same side as the mailboxes to ensure un-interrupted delivery of mail.
# Streets with sidewalk on one side – Where there are residential streets that qualify for parking restrictions, and there is sidewalk on one side of the street, the side opposite of the sidewalk should have the parking restrictions installed. The mailbox rule above should take precedence when there is a conflict between these two applications.
# Residential Areas – In addition to the policy on residential street widths discussed above, parking control may be required in residential areas affected by, but not limited to bordering schools, parks and businesses. In all instances, a traffic study will be conducted and if deemed necessary, a parking petition must be circulated and approved by over half of the owners along any affected street.
# Schools – Schools will be signed on a case by case basis as indicated by a traffic study. Generally, signs and plaques may be installed indicating “No Stopping or Standing”, or “No Parking”, and may further specify times of the day and days of the week when effective. Refer to signing standards for typical signs that will be installed in this situation.

Requests to Temporarily Cover Parking Restriction Signs: 
Exceptions to the above requirements may exist, or be granted, for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs for a short-term duration. In any such case where a request has been made and approved by the City Traffic Engineer to temporarily cover the signs, it is up to the requestor to cover the sign prior to the event as well as to uncover the signs immediately following the event. City staff will notify the Administrative Assistant of the Traffic Services Division who will in turn notify the Overland Park Police Department, and the Traffic Services Maintenance Department of the approved request.

The requestor shall not be allowed to cover any signs prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers must be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event. In the event that these timeframes are not adhered to, future requests from the requestor may not be granted.

The table below is a list of exceptions that have been granted a blanket approval to cover No Parking signs.
{| width="600px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|-
|colspan="2"|Title
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Name'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Location'''
|-
|Milburn Country Club
|Santa Fe Drive (71st Street to 67th Street)
|-
|Family Tree Nursery
|Farley (86th Street to 83rd Terrace) 85th Street (Mastin to Carter)
|-
|Villa Saint Joseph Nursing Home
|Rosewood (119th Street to Tomahawk Creek Parkway

|}
# Where approval has been granted for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs, the City Traffic Maintenance division will install sign coverings based on the timeframe requested. In certain situations, such as over weekends or holidays, the requesting entity may be required to install and remove the coverings.
# The exceptions listed in the chart above have been given sign coverings to install and remove on their own, providing the appropriate granting of permission has been followed.

Petition for the Removal of Parking Restriction Signage 
The removal of Parking restrictions on existing residential streets will go through the same petitioning process as the addition of parking restrictions. Any street which had parking restrictions signs installed as part of the petitioning process must wait twelve (12) months from the initial installation before it can be reviewed for removal of some or all of the parking restriction signs.

== Signing Standards: ==
Sign Colors

"Parking Prohibition" signs 
Where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times, the basic design for parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white retro-reflective background, except that the R8-3 sign shall have a black legend and border and a red circle and slash on a white retro-reflective background.

"Permissive Parking" signs 
Where only limited-time parking or parking in a particular manner are permitted, the signs shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflective background.

"Informational" plaques 
Additional information plaques may be mounted below or incorporated into the “Parking Prohibition” or “Permissive Parking” sign face. The text and border color shall match the color of the sign it supplements and shall be on a white retro-reflective background.

Sign Sizes

“No Parking” signs shall be 12” x 18” vertical rectangles. Additional "Informational" plaques mounted below the sign shall be 12” x 9” horizontal rectangles.

The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:

Parking Prohibition / Permissive Parking Sign Design Guidelines

2014-07-30T15:46:11Z

Mike Ross: /* City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: */

'''City Guideline Regarding the Installation of "Parking Prohibition" or “Permissive Parking” (R7 and R8 Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

Governing Document Reference:
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition], [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf City Resolution 4037 Section E] and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, Article XIII, Section 12.04.083 through Section 12.04.102].

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
"No Parking" (R7 and R8 Series) signs, by the MUTCD, are intended for use to establish parking restrictions according to State law and the City of Overland Park Municipal Code.

Parking signs should display the following information from top to bottom of the sign, in the order listed: 
:A. The restriction or prohibition; 
:B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not at all hours; and 
:C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day. 
[[File:R7 Series Parking Restriction Signs.JPG|left]][[File:R7-108.JPG|next]] 

If the parking restriction applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the restriction should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right and left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective restrictions apply.

As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, word messages such as BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, THIS SIDE OF SIGN, or BETWEEN SIGNS may be used.

== Background: ==
These guidelines are meant to create consistency within the city limits of the City of Overland Park in the installation and enforcement of parking control signs on City streets (Residential, Collector, Super Collector and Thoroughfare) and City parking lots. Its purpose is to provide a safe passageway for motorists by providing clear and consistent information.

The goal of these guidelines is to create a standard for which parking control will be consistent for same street classifications throughout the City. However, due to varying types of unforeseen safety issues, the City Traffic Engineer shall have authority to install parking control, which varies from the standard.

Design Criteria: 
These guidelines were established using the following criteria as reference:
# Assume 1'-6" of a 2'-0" curb and gutter is usable for parking. 
# Assume a typical passenger car width of 7'-0". 
# Assume a snow plow Truck width of 10'-0". 
# Assume a fire truck requires a 10’-0” travel width and a minimum of 19'-0" with the outriggers extended. 

Definitions: 
# Roadway Width - Measured from back of curb to back of curb, or edge of pavement to edge of pavement where no curb exists. Approximately eighteen inches of a two foot curb and gutter cross-section can be utilized when parking a vehicle on the road. Therefore, as an example, a 28' back to back street has 27' of usable roadway. 
# Road Segment Length - A typical block, from cross street to cross street, except in the cases of group mailboxes, fire hydrants, traffic calming measures, etc. 
# Sign Spacing - Based on the height of the No Parking Symbol of 9 inches, the maximum spacing between consecutive signs is 270 feet. This is in keeping with the MUTCD to provide 1” of letter height for every 30 feet of visibility distance. [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|(Appendix A)]] 
# Enforceable Limitations - Any location signed using the R8-3 signs should be considered as No Parking up to an installed R8-3 (L) or R8-3 (R) sign. If no termination signs exist, the parking restriction should be considered terminated at the intersection of the next cross street.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Residential Streets: 
New Residential Street Construction:
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 26’ or greater, parking is allowed on both sides of the roadway. Safety issues shall dictate any variances to this policy.
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 22’ or 24’, parking is only allowed on one side of the roadway. The side of the street upon which parking shall be restricted will be based on sidewalk location, mail box locations, or other safety considerations such as adjacent parks, schools, etc.

Existing Residential Streets: 
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets, or curbed and guttered streets with a width less than 26’ back of curb to back of curb, parking restrictions will be posted on one side of the street. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident the City may restrict parking on both sides of the street.
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets or curbed and guttered streets that meet or exceed the standard width of 26' back of curb to back of curb, the posting of parking restrictions will be on a case by case basis. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident, the City will install signs that best address the situation. Otherwise a petition must be signed by the residents. Where a Homes Association (or another such group which represents the residents) exists, a letter from this group can serve in place of a petition.
# Once an unimproved street is improved in conjunction with the City’s Neighborhood Streets Reconstruction Program, or any similar program, all “No Parking” signs that were existing prior to the improvement, will be removed where the improved street meets the requirements for New Construction, item 1 above. Residents wishing to have the signs reinstalled will be required to go through the petitioning process. Exception to this rule applies if a traffic study conducted during the design phase indicates that there is a need to keep the signs in place.

Signing Petition Process:
# Upon a request being submitted, a field investigation shall be initiated to determine whether the installation of "No Parking" sign(s) conform to this policy and will be enforceable under section 12.04 of the Overland Park Traffic Ordinance.
# When a petition is used it must be submitted by the requester with approval of over half of the homeowners who live along the affected street segment.
# The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved petition form to the requestor (see the attached form) listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.
::a. The petition will state, based on a City staff field investigation, the side of the street that the parking restriction will affect.
::b. The requestor shall circulate the petition to the addresses on the petition for the homeowner (one signature per household is all that will be accepted) to vote in either favor or against the parking restrictions. The petition must be approved by over half of the homeowners along any affected street.
::c. City staff will notify citizens at addresses on the returned petition that do not have a homeowner’s signature informing them that there has been a request for parking restrictions. They will be given the opportunity to vote in favor or against the restrictions, unless the petition receives a majority vote without their signature.

Collector Streets: 
Parking may be restricted upon an engineering study for specific circumstances as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. This includes areas near schools, parks, bicycle routes, or other similar traffic generators with sufficient on-site parking.

Thoroughfare and Super Collector Streets: 
Parking is prohibited on all thoroughfare streets, except within the downtown Overland Park District as outlined below. Parking is also prohibited on super collector streets.

Downtown District: 
# On-street parking in the downtown Overland Park district shall be limited to 2 or 3-hour parking unless otherwise posted as short-term (5 or 15 minute) parking as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.
# The following streets have been identified as falling within the Downtown District: Santa Fe Drive between 79th Street and Conser Street; 80th Street between Metcalf Avenue and Conser Street: Conser from Santa Fe to 79th: 79th St from Conser to Metcalf.

Other Typical Applications: 
The following applications are typical and do not reflect all possible situations where parking control may be needed. See [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|Appendix A]] for typical sign location applications and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Section 12.04.085 of the Overland Park Municipal Code] for a complete listing of enforceable parking control situations:
# Fire hydrants – On-street parking shall be restricted fifteen (15) feet on either side of the Fire hydrant.
# Crosswalks – Parking shall be restricted within twenty (20) feet of a crosswalk at an intersection twenty (20) feet on either side of a mid-block crosswalk.
# Intersections – Parking shall be restricted within thirty (30) feet upon the approach to any flashing signal, stop sign, or traffic control signal located at the side of a roadway.
# Group mailboxes – Parking shall be restricted ten (10) feet on either side of the mailboxes.
# Streets with curb side mailboxes – Residential streets, which qualify for parking restrictions, and have residential mailboxes installed along the curb on one side of the street, should have the signs installed on the same side as the mailboxes to ensure un-interrupted delivery of mail.
# Streets with sidewalk on one side – Where there are residential streets that qualify for parking restrictions, and there is sidewalk on one side of the street, the side opposite of the sidewalk should have the parking restrictions installed. The mailbox rule above should take precedence when there is a conflict between these two applications.
# Residential Areas – In addition to the policy on residential street widths discussed above, parking control may be required in residential areas affected by, but not limited to bordering schools, parks and businesses. In all instances, a traffic study will be conducted and if deemed necessary, a parking petition must be circulated and approved by over half of the owners along any affected street.
# Schools – Schools will be signed on a case by case basis as indicated by a traffic study. Generally, signs and plaques may be installed indicating “No Stopping or Standing”, or “No Parking”, and may further specify times of the day and days of the week when effective. Refer to signing standards for typical signs that will be installed in this situation.

Requests to Temporarily Cover Parking Restriction Signs: 
Exceptions to the above requirements may exist, or be granted, for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs for a short-term duration. In any such case where a request has been made and approved by the City Traffic Engineer to temporarily cover the signs, it is up to the requestor to cover the sign prior to the event as well as to uncover the signs immediately following the event. City staff will notify the Administrative Assistant of the Traffic Services Division who will in turn notify the Overland Park Police Department, and the Traffic Services Maintenance Department of the approved request.

The requestor shall not be allowed to cover any signs prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers must be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event. In the event that these timeframes are not adhered to, future requests from the requestor may not be granted.

The table below is a list of exceptions that have been granted a blanket approval to cover No Parking signs.
{| width="600px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|-
|colspan="2"|Title
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Name'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Location'''
|-
|Milburn Country Club
|Santa Fe Drive (71st Street to 67th Street)
|-
|Family Tree Nursery
|Farley (86th Street to 83rd Terrace) 85th Street (Mastin to Carter)
|-
|Villa Saint Joseph Nursing Home
|Rosewood (119th Street to Tomahawk Creek Parkway

|}
# Where approval has been granted for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs, the City Traffic Maintenance division will install sign coverings based on the timeframe requested. In certain situations, such as over weekends or holidays, the requesting entity may be required to install and remove the coverings.
# The exceptions listed in the chart above have been given sign coverings to install and remove on their own, providing the appropriate granting of permission has been followed.

Petition for the Removal of Parking Restriction Signage 
The removal of Parking restrictions on existing residential streets will go through the same petitioning process as the addition of parking restrictions. Any street which had parking restrictions signs installed as part of the petitioning process must wait twelve (12) months from the initial installation before it can be reviewed for removal of some or all of the parking restriction signs.

== Signing Standards: ==
Sign Colors

"Parking Prohibition" signs 
Where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times, the basic design for parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white retro-reflective background, except that the R8-3 sign shall have a black legend and border and a red circle and slash on a white retro-reflective background.

"Permissive Parking" signs 
Where only limited-time parking or parking in a particular manner are permitted, the signs shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflective background.

"Informational" plaques 
Additional information plaques may be mounted below or incorporated into the “Parking Prohibition” or “Permissive Parking” sign face. The text and border color shall match the color of the sign it supplements and shall be on a white retro-reflective background.

Sign Sizes

“No Parking” signs shall be 12” x 18” vertical rectangles. Additional "Informational" plaques mounted below the sign shall be 12” x 9” horizontal rectangles.

The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:

File:TRF PQL TS MEM DuraLine PushLockCouplings.pdf

2014-07-10T16:58:27Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross uploaded a new version of "File:TRF PQL TS MEM DuraLine PushLockCouplings.pdf"

Template:Dont use this file

2014-05-13T15:30:03Z

Mike Ross:

[[File:skullCrossbones.png|100px]]''''Don't use this file - it has been eliminated'.'''

File:SkullCrossbones.png

2014-05-13T15:28:36Z

Mike Ross:

File:III-11-2 Proposal.docx

2014-05-13T15:25:20Z

Mike Ross:

Proposal

{{Dont use this file}}
[[Category: Phase III Exhibits]]
[[Category: Contract Documents]]

Template:Dont use this file

2014-05-13T15:23:23Z

Mike Ross: Created page with "''''Don't use this file - it has been eliminated'.'''"

''''Don't use this file - it has been eliminated'.'''

File:III-11-1 Agreement.docx

2014-05-13T15:22:33Z

Mike Ross:

Agreement
[[Category: Phase III Exhibits]]

{{Dont use this file}}

File:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix SDLCInterfaceExtensionModule.pdf

2014-04-22T19:15:59Z

Mike Ross:

Phase IV - Pre-Construction

2014-04-16T21:45:13Z

Mike Ross: /* Task No. 2 - Selection of Material Testing Firm */

{{Navbar}}
== Introduction ==
{{Introduction
|This phase is referred to by KDOT as the Letting phase and has important legal significance. Legal advertisement with proper publication has to occur prior to a bid opening. KDOT requires contractor pre-qualificiations and Contractor collusion evaluation for Federal funded projects.

Bids are tabulated, evaluated and a City staff recommendation is prepared regarding the contract award for presentation to the City Council. If Federal funds are involved, the bids must receive KDOT concurrence prior to consideration by the City Council.
}}

== [[Phase IV Checklist]] ==


== Task No. 1 - Complete Plans, Specifications and Estimate ==
{{ Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall make all final plan revisions, complete the specifications and prepare the final Engineer’s construction cost estimate. The City project team and consultant will determine what materials the contractor will be required to submit during the construction phase and who will be responsible for reviewing and approving the submittals.

See [[media:Blp-memo-03-12.pdf|'''BLP Memo 03-12''']] Engineer's Professional Seal and Signature on Plans.

== Task No. 2 - Selection of Material Testing Firm ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall verify testing services for each project as required,prepare, and distribute RFPs to at least three qualified private material testing companies in accordance with [[Media:II-3a.pdf|'''City Resolution No.3982''']].

{{Exhibit|IV-2a.docx|No. IV-2a|is a list of materials testing / geotechnical service companies.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2b.dot|No. IV-2b|is a sample RFP transmittal letter to material testing companies.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2 Testing Proposal Exhibit A - rev 4-4-14.docx|No. IV-2c|is the material testing proposal instructions (Exhibit A).}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2 Testing Proposal Exhibit B - rev 4-4-14.docx|No. IV-2d|is a sample of the material testing proposal (Exhibit B). (word version)}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2d.xlt|No. IV-2d|is a sample of the material testing proposal (Exhibit B). (excel version)}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2e.dot|No. IV-2e|is the material and testing specifications (Exhibit C).}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2f.dot|No. IV-2f|is the Material Sampling and Testing Frequency Chart (Exhibit D).}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2g Construction Material Testing Services Agreement 8-23-12.doc|No. IV-2g|is the Agreement for Construction Material Testing Services.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-2h.dot|No. IV-2h|is the Supplemental Agreement for Construction Material Testing Services.}}

== Task No. 3 - Set Bid Opening Date - Schedule Room ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager in conjunction with the Contract Specialist will determine the bid opening date. Consideration of publishing the legal advertisement(s) (see Task No. 4 below) will be taken into consideration. The Contract Specialist will schedule a room for receiving bids. The room location will be included in the legal publication.

The Project Manager shall determine if a pre-bid conference is required prior to preparing the notice to bidders. If one is required, it shall be scheduled approximately one week prior to the bid opening. The Notice to Bidders shall give this date as information to potential bidders and will serve as the invitation to this meeting. It shall be determined by the Project Manager whether attendance will be a requirement for submitting a bid.

See '''[[Planning Bid and Contract Award Schedules]]''' for the bidding/contract award process timeline.

== Task No. 4 - Publish Legal Advertisement ==
{{Top}}

Generally, the project shall be advertised approximately '''3 weeks''' prior to the scheduled bid opening for construction projects and 12 days for equipment and material bids. The Project Manager is to provide the Contract Specialist the notice to bidders electronically by 3:00 pm Thursday so they can arrange for publication in the Tuesday edition of the '''[http://www.thelegalrecord.net The Legal Record]'''. The Contract Specialist shall check the newspaper on the day of scheduled publication to make sure the notice was published.

For KDOT projects, advertisement shall also be in the '''[http://www.kssos.org/pubs/pubs_kansas_register.asp Kansas Register]''', '''30 days''' prior to the scheduled bid opening. Kansas Register publications are released on Thursdays. The notice to bidders shall be received by the Kansas Register one week prior to scheduled advertisement.

The Notice shall be e-mailed to Nancy Reddy (Office of the Secretary of State): [mailto:NancyR@kssos.org '''NancyR@kssos.org''']

== Task No. 5 - Notice to Contractors/DBE Firms ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Administrative Assistant shall mail to specialty contractors and DBE firms the Notice to Bidders.
{{Exhibit|IV-5a.docx|No. IV-5a|is a list of contractors for Street and Bridge projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5b.docx|No. IV-5b|is a list of contractors for Storm Sewer projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5c.docx|No. IV-5c|is a list of contractors for Sidewalk and Curb projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5d.docx|No. IV-5d|is a list of contractors for Streetlight projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5e.docx|No. IV-5e|is a list of contractors for Traffic Signal projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5f.docx|No. IV-5f|is a list of contractors for Traffic Signal and Streetlighting Equipment.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5g.docx|No. IV-5g|is a list of contractors for Fiber Optic projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5h.docx|No. IV-5h|is a list of contractors for Demolition projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5i.docx|No. IV-5i|is a list of contractors for Building projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5j.docx|No. IV-5j|is a list of contractors for Building Mechanical Systems projects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5k.dot|No. IV-5k|is a list of Architects.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-5l.docx|No. IV-5l|is a list of plan rooms associated with DBE contractors. They are to receive, without cost, a copy of the plans and specifications.}}

== Task No. 6 - Distribute Plans, Contract Documents and Estimate ==
{{Top}}

The plans/contract documents shall be distributed by the office that prepared the plans/contract documents to potential bidders. The Consultant/Project Manager shall establish a fair price for the plans/contract documents which amount shall not be refundable. This amount shall be included in the Notice to Bidders as well as the not refundable statement.

The Consultant or City who is distributing/selling the plans shall assign a person to record all plan holders.

Plans and Contract Documents shall be provided free to the plan rooms as listed on [[media:IV-5l.docx|'''Exhibit No. IV-5l''']]

The final Engineer’s construction cost estimate shall be forwarded to the Contract Specialist one day prior to the bid opening. This estimate shall be notarized and sealed in an envelope.

{{Exhibit|Exhibit IV-6.docx|No. IV-6|is a sample Engineer’s construction cost estimate.}}

{{Note
|Engineer's Estimate shall be signed and stamped by the PE}}

After the City Council has awarded the Contract, the original estimate is forwarded to the City Clerk’s office and a copy placed in the project file.

The Project Manager will send two (2) full size sets of plans to the Maintenance Division. One set will be the complete set of project plans. The other set will include only the traffic components, i.e. streetlight, signals, signs and pavement markings. Both sets are sent to the engineering technician at the Blue Valley Maintenance Division Office.

== Task No. 7 - Conduct Pre-Bid Conference ==
{{Top}}

If a pre-bid conference is scheduled by the Project Manager, an agenda shall be prepared and distributed at the beginning of the meeting.

{{Exhibit|IV-7.dot|No. IV-7|is a sample Pre-Bid Conference Agenda.}}
{{Exhibit|II-7e.dot|No. II-7e|is a meeting sign in sheet.}}

:'''The following issues are appropriate to discuss:'''
:*Project scope/requirements,
:*Any unusual contract requirements,
:*Any unusual work requirements,
:*Contract completion date,
:*Traffic control plan(s), and
:*Contractor/bidder questions.

{{Note
|In an effort to avoid scheduling conflicts with other called utility meetings an Outlook calendar has been created called PW Utilities. PW Utilities shall be invited as an attendee to all utility meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meeting requesting utility company attendance.
}}

== Task No. 8 - Determine Contractor Qualifications ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall determine if the Contractor requesting plans is qualified to perform the work.

For a KDOT project, the Contractor selected to perform the work shall be on KDOT’s latest qualification list for the class of work. One week prior to the legal advertisement date, the Project Manager shall obtain from the Bureau of Construction and Maintenance, KDOT, the latest list of [http://www.ksdot.org/divoperat/rptInternetList.pdf '''Pre-Qualified Contractors'''] to perform the class of work involved with the project. The directory can also be found at '''http://www.ksdot.org/hwycont.asp'''.

If the Contractor requesting plans is not on KDOT's contractor qualification list, plans will not be issued by the City.
{{Exhibit|IV-8.pdf|No. IV-8|is an example of KDOT's Class or Classes of Work.}}

== Task No. 9 - Prepare Contract Addendum ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager, as a result of the Pre-Bid Conference or other Contractor inquires/suggestions, may make final contract document changes, prior to the bid opening, by issuing an addendum. The addendum shall be prepared and communicated/faxed to all plan holders of record. For federal-aid projects all addenda must be submitted to the Bureau of Local Projects for prior approval before being distributed to plan holders. See [[media:blp-memo-6-17-2010.pdf|'''BLP Memo''']] dated 6-17-2010.

Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except an addendum withdrawing the request for bids or one which includes postponement of the date to receive bids.
{{Exhibit|IV-9.pdf|No. IV-9|is a sample transmittal letter and addendum.}}

The Davis Bacon Wage Determinations used for KDOT projects shall be those in effect no more than ten days prior to the letting. If modifications have been made since advertisement an addendum showing the current Wage Determinations shall be issued.

See '''http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/ppreq/wagedet.asp'''.

== Task No. 10 - Complete Bid Opening ==
{{Top}}

One or two days prior to the bid opening date, the Contract Specialist will prepare a bid tabulation form.

If addenda to the contract documents have been issued by the Consultant/Project Manager, this must be indicated on the bid tab.

The bids are opened by the City Clerk and recorded by the Contract Specialist and at least one member of the City Clerk’s office.

{{Exhibit|IV-10.dot|No. IV-10|is a sample bid summary form.}}

== Task No. 11 - Complete Detailed Bid Tabulation ==
{{Top}}

Subsequent to the bid opening and prior to the scheduled City Council Award of contract, the Consultant/Project Engineer shall prepare a detailed bid tabulation from the submitted contractors bid proposals.

This detailed bid tabulation shall be in the same format as the contract document bid form. The accuracy of the contractor’s multiplication and addition shall be checked and confirmed, any errors will be corrected/marked on the original bid proposal.

Contractor's and/or Vendor's proposals that include variances or exceptions will be reviewed by either the Project Manager or the appropriate Maintenance Superintendent to determine if the proposal meets the contract documents and specifications.

The Engineer’s estimate shall also be included on the bid tabulation.

The Engineer's estimate and the detailed bid tabulation on all projects are to remain confidential prior to acceptance by the City Council, then all information is public.

{{Exhibit|IV-11.xlsx |No. IV-11|is a sample detailed bid tabulation.}}

== Task No. 12 - Determine and Approve the Lowest and Best Qualified Contractor and Subcontractor Percent of Work ==
{{Top}}

For non-KDOT projects, the Project Manager shall determine if the low bid Contractor has performed similar and satisfactory work for the City of Overland Park or other cities in the Kansas City Metro area. Critical Contractor information to be obtained is as follows:

*materials/products used tested satisfactory,
*contractor staking skills,
*pavement smoothness/rideability,
*punchlist items handled quickly/professionally,
*public relations skills,
*name of project superintendent capabilities/skills/years of experience/type of projects,
*work completed within contract time period,
*possible bid rigging,
*current projects underway,
*references for projects completed for public agencies in the Kansas City Metro area during the last two years, and
*list of available equipment.

Immediately after the bid opening the Project Manager shall prepare a Sub-contractor Breakdown Form and forward to the apparent low bidder. The apparent low bidder shall complete the form showing all sub-contractors, if any, their address, associated bid item numbers, and bid item amount the sub-contractor is to perform.

{{Exhibit|IV-12.xlt|No. IV-12|is a Subcontractor Breakdown Form to be completed by the apparent low bidder. (KDOT Project)}}
{{Exhibit|IV-12a.xlt|No. IV-12a|is a Subcontractor Breakdown Form to be completed by the apparent low bidder. (Non-KDOT Project)}}

{{Note|For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT see [[media:II-14.xlt|'''Exhibit No. II-14''']]. The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete.}}

After the bids have been opened the Project Manager sends a letter/form to the DBE subcontractor(s) requesting commitment in writing.

{{Exhibit|IV-12b.dot|No. IV-12b|is a sample letter/form to DBE subcontractor(s) to sign and return.}}

For additional requirements on KDOT projects {{LPA_citation|15.4.3.4.2|[[Media:15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures 10-2011.pdf|'''15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures''']]}}

== Task No. 13 - Evaluate Possible Contractor Collusion ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall perform a manual review of all bids received for evidence of collusion. Due to the frequency of specific project work, the Engineering Staff has become well-informed as to the current market value of specific bid items of work within the Johnson County area.

The City Engineering Staff also maintains itemized records of all bids received and opened for each project. This permits a regular routine comparison by the City Engineering Staff for potential bid rigging by Contractors.

For Bid Analysis Guidelines refer to {{LPA_citation|15.4.3.4.2|[[Media:15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures 10-2011.pdf|'''15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures ''']]}}.

The following is a link to a FHWA [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/programadmin/contracts/ta508046.cfm#s5 '''Guidelines on Preparing Engineer's Estimate, Bid Reviews and Evaluation''']

== Task No. 14 - Determine Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) Involvement ==
{{Top}}

For KDOT projects the Project Manager shall send via fax all DBE goal sheets with a bid tab of all bidders to KDOT's External Civil Rights Administrator (ECRA), FAX (785)296-0723. The ECRA will review and provide a recommendation on how to proceed. If the DBE goal is not met or exceeded, the apparent low bidder has 48 hours to provide the ECRA its written documentation of a good faith effort to meet the DBE goals prior to submitting their bid. If the good faith effort documentation is accepted, the contract process can proceed. If it is not accepted, then the second low bidder will be reviewed for compliance.

{{Exhibit|IV-14.pdf|No. IV-14|is an example of a completed DBE Contract Goals form.}}

The project manager is also to verify that every DBE listed by each bidder is currently certified by KDOT. The DBE certification directory is updated monthly by KDOT. The Project Manager shall contact the External EEO Section, Office of Engineering Support, Docking State Office Building, Topeka, KS, (785) 296-7940 for the latest updated listing of DBE firms. The directory can also be found at '''http://www.ksdot.org/divadmin/civilrights''' and should be verified as current revision with External EEO Section.

{{Note|DBE involvement is documented and reported throughout the contract. [[media:IV-14a.pdf|'''Exhibit No. IV-14a''']] is correspondence from KDOT regarding DBE Reporting Requirements. These requirements appear in subsequent tasks throughout the manual.}}

== Task No. 15 - Obtain Project Temporary Financing ==
{{Top}}

Prior to Contract award by the City Council, the Project Manager shall provide the Finance Department a project cost breakdown as shown in [[media:IV-18c.xlsx|'''Exhibit No. IV-18c''']]. The Funding Source(s) and Summary may be obtained from the Capital Improvements Program and executed agency agreements.
The Project Manager shall determine the amount, if any, of funds which were escrowed for the construction of this project. If funds have been escrowed, the Project Manager shall write a memo to the Finance Department identifying the specific escrow funds which should be transferred to the project account.

{{Exhibit|IV-15a Escrow memo.docx|No. IV-15a|is a template for creating the escrow memo.}}

== Task No. 16 - Receive Bid Approval from KDOT ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall forward to the BLP-KDOT the bid tabulation and staff recommendation for contract award.

{{Exhibit|IV-16a.dot|No. IV-16a|is a sample transmittal letter to BLP-KDOT.}}

== Task No. 17 - Receive Concurrence and Award from KDOT ==
{{Top}}

The BLP-KDOT shall inform the City, in writing, upon concurrence with the City Staff recommendation regarding the contract award.

{{Exhibit|IV-17a.dot|No. IV-17a| is a sample form "Authority to Award Contract/Commitment of Federal/State Funds".}}

{{Note|This task is tracked by KDOT. See '''[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/images/II-14.xlt Exhibit No. II-14]'''. The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete.}}

== Task No. 18 - Submit Staff Recommendation for Contract Award ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall make a written recommendation to the Department Director. If all bids exceed the Engineer’s estimate by more than seven percent, a written explanation must accompany the recommendation. The Department Director shall submit the bid tabulation and staff recommendation to City Council.

{{Note|If the total estimated project cost exceeds the City Council Resolution creating the Improvement District (Project), by more than 10 percent, the ID must be recreated.}}

{{Exhibit|IV-18a.pdf|No. IV-18a|is City Charter Ordinance No. 71.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-18b.dot|No. IV-18b|is a sample project cost memo.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-18c.xlsx|No. IV-18c|is a sample staff project cost estimate breakdown.}}

== Task No. 19 - Award Contract by City Council ==
{{Top}}

The City Council will either accept the recommendation or reject all bids or proposals received. Upon acceptance, a notice of the contract award is sent to the successful bidder and a notice of rejection is sent to the unsuccessful bidders. Following receipt of the contract documents and approval of the insurance and bonds by the Contract Specialist, the contract is executed by the authorized official.

{{Exhibit|IV-19a.dot|No. IV-19a|is a sample award letter sent to the successful bidder.}}
{{Exhibit|IV-19b.dot|No. IV-19b|is a sample rejection letter sent to the unsuccessful bidders.}}

== Task No. 20 - Submit Letting Summary Document to KDOT ==
{{Top}}

Upon completion of the Letting Phase, the City will provide BLP-KDOT with a “Letting Summary Document” that certifies the letting process has been completed and the contract has been awarded in accordance with the requirements of this Projects and Procedures Manual, as well as Chapter [[Media:15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures 10-2011.pdf|'''15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual''', and Sections 102, 103 and 104 of the '''Kansas Standard Specifications'''. This document shall be submitted to the Project Development Engineer within one month after receiving the Authority to Award document.

In addition, a signed copy of the contract with all required certifications will be submitted to KDOT at this time. A breakout of the project construction costs (Bid Item List) by work type (i.e., roadway, surfacing, bridges,traffic signals, and common items) and with non-participating items marked as such, shall be submitted to BLP at this time. This needs to be as Excel spreadsheet using formulas in the total column (do not hard key the numbers).

{{Exhibit|IV-20a letting summary transmittal.doc|No. IV-20a| is a sample transmittal letter to KDOT.}}

{{Exhibit|IV-20b Letting Summary Document.docx|No. IV-20b| is a sample "Letting Summary Document".}}

{{Exhibit|IV-20c Breakout of construction costs.xlsx|No. IV-20c| is a sample "Breakout of Construction Costs by Participation and Work Type".}}

{{Exhibit|Iv-20d.pdf|No. IV-20d| is correspondence from KDOT regarding Breakout of Construction Costs.}}

{{Note|This task is tracked by KDOT see [[media:II-14.xlt|'''Exhibit No. II-14''']]. The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete.}}

== [[:Category:Phase IV Exhibits|All Phase IV Exhibits]] ==

File:TFR PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG

2014-04-07T16:40:31Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross moved page File:TFR PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG to File:TRF PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG: misspelled

#REDIRECT [[File:TRF PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG]]

File:TRF PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG

2014-04-07T16:40:31Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross moved page File:TFR PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG to File:TRF PQL SL PHOT Valmont OP14Pole OpenHandhole.JPG: misspelled

File:TRF-PQL-FO-CSF.pdf

2014-04-04T21:31:05Z

Mike Ross:

Yield Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-06T17:10:55Z

Mike Ross: /* City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Yield” Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC) 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080, and {{Resolution_4037}}.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered:
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches;
:B. Number and angle of approaches;
:C. Approach speeds;
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and
:E. Reported crash experience.

“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law;
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area.

In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist:
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day;
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period.

Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect:
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic.

“Yield” (R1-2) signs assign right-of-way to traffic on certain approaches to an intersection. Vehicles controlled by a “Yield” sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic. “Yield” signs may be installed:
#On the approaches to a through street or highway where conditions are such that a full stop is not always required.
#For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a traffic control signal or by a “Stop” sign.
#An intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the “Yield” sign.
#Facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation.

The “Yield” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. The “Yield” sign shall be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate. Except at roundabouts, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Yield” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic.

If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional “Yield” sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach. If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single lane roundabout approach, an additional “Yield” sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.

“Yield” lines, that are used to supplement a “Yield” sign, should be located at the point behind which vehicles are required to yield.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
The reviewer should observe the intersection sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance cannot be achieved according to the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets], latest edition. “Yield” signs will be installed at locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic. A field investigation is required to determine if a “Yield” sign is to be installed at various types of intersections as follows.

T-Intersections: 
#If intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street at residential / residential street “T”–intersections with no control are not met based on [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case I (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]], some type of control should be considered. The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets], latest edition.
#If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered. According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign should be considered. Refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28' back to back residential streets. (Also see [[Stop Sign Design Guidelines]] Regarding the Installation of "Stop Signs”)
#When not called for based on sight distance requirement, a “Yield” sign may be posted at residential T-intersections (3-leg) to assign right-of-way. The leg (or legs) to be signed will be determined by engineering judgment based on driver expectations. A typical situation where assignment of ROW is needed is a situation where the major street is the leg of the T-intersection. An example of such a situation is the intersection of 164th and Ash. Ash, which is the connecting street between the neighborhood and the collector street, intersects at a “T” with 164th Street. Being identified as the major street a driver on Ash may assume the right-of-way at 164th Street. However, as Ash is the leg of the T-intersection, a driver on 164th may also assume the right-of-way. Thus the need to assign right-of-way arises.

Roundabouts: 
#“Yield” signs will only be installed on the right hand side of the approach lanes and not on the left hand side in the splitter island at single lane roundabouts.
#At multi-lane roundabouts, an additional “Yield” sign will be installed in the splitter island on the left hand side of the approach.

At Free-Flow Right Turn Lanes: 
#“Yield” signs will be installed at locations where free-flow right turn lanes merge onto another street, e.g. at ramp terminals coming off the interstate or other highway.

Conditions where “Yield” signs will not be installed: 
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action or as determined by the City Traffic Engineer.
#Typically, “Yield” signs will not be installed at any intersection other than T-intersections, roundabouts, or at locations of free-flow right turn lanes.
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.

== Sign Standards: ==
The standard size of the “Yield” (R1-2) sign will be 36” x 36” x 36” when facing traffic on a single lane approach and 48” x 48” x 48” when facing traffic on a multi-lane approach. It shall be a downward-pointing equilateral triangle with a wide red border and the legend YIELD in red on a white retro-reflectorized background.

== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==
'''12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer'''
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City. 
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic. 

(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)

=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===
'''12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.'''
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right. 
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance. 

(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP '3, 98; TC-1260 '56, 84)

'''12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.'''
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.

(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 '57, 84)

'''12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.'''
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs. 
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. 
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver's failure to yield right-of-way.

(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)

'''12.04.060 Vehicle Entering Roadway.'''
The driver of a vehicle about to enter or cross a roadway from any place other than another roadway shall yield the right-of-way to all vehicles approaching on the roadway to be entered or crossed.

(History: K.S.A.8-1529; Ord. TC-1260 §59, 84) See: 12.04.002 & 12.04.080

'''12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.'''
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.

(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 '79, 84)

Stop Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-05T17:44:03Z

Mike Ross: /* MUTCD Requirements: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Stop” Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC) 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080, and {{Resolution_4037}}.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered: 
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches; 
:B. Number and angle of approaches; 
:C. Approach speeds; 
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and 
:E. Reported crash experience. 
[[File:R1-1 withR1-3P.PNG|right]]
“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law; 
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or 
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area. 

In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist: 
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day; 
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. 

Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect: 
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes; 
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and 
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic. 

When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be used.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs, an “All Way” supplemental plaque (R1-3p) shall be mounted below each “Stop” sign. The “All Way” plaque shall only be used if all intersection approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs.

At intersections where a full stop is not necessary at all times, consideration should first be given to using less restrictive measures such as ”Yield” signs. The use of “Stop” signs on the minor-street approaches should be considered if engineering judgment indicates that a stop is always required because of one or more of the following conditions: 
:A. The vehicular traffic volumes on the through street or highway exceed 6,000 vehicles per day; 
:B. A restricted view exists that requires road users to stop in order to adequately observe conflicting traffic on the through street or highway; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that three or more crashes that are susceptible to correction by the installation of a “Stop” sign have been reported within a 12-month period, or that five or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. Such crashes include right-angle collisions involving road users on the minor-street approach failing to yield the right-of-way to traffic on the through street or highway. 

Multi-way Stop Applications 
Multi-way stop control can be useful as a safety measure at intersections if certain traffic conditions exist. Safety concerns associated with multi-way stops include pedestrians, bicyclists, and all road users expecting other road users to stop. Multi-way stop control is used where the volume of traffic on the intersecting roads is approximately equal. The decision to install multi-way stop control should be based on an engineering study. The following criteria should be considered in the engineering study for a multi-way “Stop” sign installation: 
:A. Where traffic control signals are justified, the multi-way stop is an interim measure that can be installed quickly to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of the traffic control signal. 
:B. Five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period that are susceptible to correction by a multi-way stop installation. Such crashes include right-turn and left-turn collisions as well as right-angle collisions. 
:C. Minimum volumes: 
:#The vehicular volume entering the intersection from the major street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 300 vehicles per hour for any 8 hours of an average day; and 
:#The combined vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle volume entering the intersection from the minor street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 200 units per hour for the same 8 hours, with an average delay to minor-street vehicular traffic of at least 30 seconds per vehicle during the highest hour; but 
:#If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants are 70 percent of the values provided in Items 1 and 2 above. 
:D. Where no single criterion is satisfied, but where Criteria B, C.1, and C.2 are all satisfied to 80 percent of the minimum values. Criterion C.3 is excluded from this condition.

Other criteria that may be considered in an engineering study include: 
:A. The need to control left-turn conflicts; 
:B. The need to control vehicle/pedestrian conflicts near locations that generate high pedestrian volumes; 
:C. Locations where a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop; and 
:D. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where multi-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection. 

The “Stop” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the “Stop” sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a “Stop Ahead” (W3-1) sign shall be installed in advance of the “Stop” sign.

The “Stop” sign should be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate. Stop lines that are used to supplement a “Stop” sign should be located at the point where the road user should stop. Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Stop” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Two-Way Stop Control: 
A field investigation is required to determine if a “Stop” sign is to be installed at intersections except as noted in the following “Additional Installation Criteria”. The reviewer should observe the horizontal sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance is available according to [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case A (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]] in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/item_details.aspx?id=1917 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets],latest edition. Also refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for additional guidelines for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28' back to back residential streets.

Multi-Way Stop Control: 
Multi-way “Stop” signs should only be installed if the intersection meets the warrants for a multi-way “Stop” as outlined in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (MUTCD). 24-hour traffic volumes should be collected in order to perform a full warrant analysis. If it is suspected that traffic volumes are minimal from the side street, peak hour turning movement volumes only may be collected as a preliminary analysis. Traffic accident information should also be reviewed for a continuous 12-month period to determine if the accident warrant is met. If the 24-hour or peak hour volumes or accident numbers do not meet the minimum levels as outlined in the warrants for “Stop” signs according to the MUTCD, the multi-way “Stop” sign control will not be recommended for installation.

Additional City of Overland Park Installation Criteria: 
''Conditions for Immediate Justification of “Stop” Sign Installation:''
#On residential streets or collector streets at intersections with major thoroughfares.
#On residential streets at any intersection (3-leg or 4-leg) with collector streets. This also includes cul-de-sac streets with street throats of any length except that “eye-brow” type cul-de-sacs will not require “Stop” signs.
#On private streets, commercial drive entrances or “eye-brow” cul-de-sacs that form the fourth leg of the intersection directly across from a residential or collector street that has “Stop” sign control or is scheduled to have “Stop” sign control.
#On the two minor approaches of residential streets at all four-way residential – residential street intersections in order to assign right-of-way. The minor streets will be determined based on volumes and engineering judgment. Intersections with more than four legs and misaligned intersections will also be signed under this category based on engineering judgment.
#At residential / residential street “T”–intersections when the intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street with no control are not met. The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the AASHTO publication, A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, latest edition. (See the attached exhibits). If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered. According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign shall be installed. (See the “City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of Yield Signs”)
#At other locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic.

''Conditions for Consideration of “Stop” Signs upon Completion of a Traffic Study or Evaluation of a Request:<''br>
#On private streets or commercial drives with long approaches that give the appearance of a public street. This would include locations regardless of whether there is a separate concrete driveway approach apron or not. Engineering judgment is used in making this determination.
#If an existing stop controlled private street or commercial drive is across from a new “uncontrolled” private street or commercial drive, a “Stop” sign may be installed on the new private street or commercial drive.

''Conditions Where “Stop” Signs Will Not Be Installed:<''br>
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action.
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.

Maintenance of Existing “Stop” Signs 
''When Existing “Stop” Signs Do NOT Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#On private streets or commercial drives that do not give the appearance of a through street, any existing signs will be left in place until they get knocked down or need maintenance. At that time, the signs will not be replaced.

''When Existing “Stop” Signs Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#“Stop” signs meeting the above guidelines shall be re-installed immediately upon notification of a knockdown or other required maintenance.

Converting a Multi-Way Stop Control to a Two-Way Stop Control 
The continued need for an existing multi-way stop control may be evaluated by the staff. If the warrants for a multi-way stop as indicated above are not met a proposal will be presented to the Public Works Committee for conversion to a two-way stop control.

== Sign Standards: ==
Size: 
The standard size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign that faces traffic on conventional multi-lane road approaches shall be 36” x 36”.

Where side roads intersect a conventional multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 45 mph or higher, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing the side road approach shall be 36” x 36”, even if the side road has only one approach lane.

Where side roads intersect a multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing traffic on the side road approach shall be 30” x 30” if the side road has a single lane approach and 36” x 36” if the side road has a multi-lane approach.

To assist in determining the proper “Stop” sign size that should be used, see the attached “Flow Chart for Determining Minimum Stop Sign Size” at the end of this document.

The standard size of the “All Way” (R1-3p) plaque shall be 18” x 6”.

Color and Shape: 
The “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be an octagon with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

The “All Way” (R1-3p) sign shall be a rectangle with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==
'''12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer'''
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City. 
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic. 

(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)

=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===
'''12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.'''
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right. 
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance. 

(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP '3, 98; TC-1260 '56, 84)

'''12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.'''
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.

(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 '57, 84)

'''12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.'''
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs. 
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. 
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver's failure to yield right-of-way.

(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)

'''12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.'''
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.

(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 '79, 84)

File:R1-1 withR1-3P.PNG

2014-02-05T17:43:17Z

Mike Ross:

Stop Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-05T17:33:26Z

Mike Ross: /* Governing Document Reference: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Stop” Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC) 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080, and {{Resolution_4037}}.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered: 
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches; 
:B. Number and angle of approaches; 
:C. Approach speeds; 
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and 
:E. Reported crash experience. 

“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law; 
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or 
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area. 

In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist: 
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day; 
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. 

Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect: 
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes; 
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and 
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic. 

When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be used.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs, an “All Way” supplemental plaque (R1-3p) shall be mounted below each “Stop” sign. The “All Way” plaque shall only be used if all intersection approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs.

At intersections where a full stop is not necessary at all times, consideration should first be given to using less restrictive measures such as ”Yield” signs. The use of “Stop” signs on the minor-street approaches should be considered if engineering judgment indicates that a stop is always required because of one or more of the following conditions: 
:A. The vehicular traffic volumes on the through street or highway exceed 6,000 vehicles per day; 
:B. A restricted view exists that requires road users to stop in order to adequately observe conflicting traffic on the through street or highway; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that three or more crashes that are susceptible to correction by the installation of a “Stop” sign have been reported within a 12-month period, or that five or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. Such crashes include right-angle collisions involving road users on the minor-street approach failing to yield the right-of-way to traffic on the through street or highway. 

Multi-way Stop Applications 
Multi-way stop control can be useful as a safety measure at intersections if certain traffic conditions exist. Safety concerns associated with multi-way stops include pedestrians, bicyclists, and all road users expecting other road users to stop. Multi-way stop control is used where the volume of traffic on the intersecting roads is approximately equal. The decision to install multi-way stop control should be based on an engineering study. The following criteria should be considered in the engineering study for a multi-way “Stop” sign installation: 
:A. Where traffic control signals are justified, the multi-way stop is an interim measure that can be installed quickly to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of the traffic control signal. 
:B. Five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period that are susceptible to correction by a multi-way stop installation. Such crashes include right-turn and left-turn collisions as well as right-angle collisions. 
:C. Minimum volumes: 
:#The vehicular volume entering the intersection from the major street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 300 vehicles per hour for any 8 hours of an average day; and 
:#The combined vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle volume entering the intersection from the minor street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 200 units per hour for the same 8 hours, with an average delay to minor-street vehicular traffic of at least 30 seconds per vehicle during the highest hour; but 
:#If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants are 70 percent of the values provided in Items 1 and 2 above. 
:D. Where no single criterion is satisfied, but where Criteria B, C.1, and C.2 are all satisfied to 80 percent of the minimum values. Criterion C.3 is excluded from this condition.

Other criteria that may be considered in an engineering study include: 
:A. The need to control left-turn conflicts; 
:B. The need to control vehicle/pedestrian conflicts near locations that generate high pedestrian volumes; 
:C. Locations where a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop; and 
:D. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where multi-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection. 

The “Stop” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the “Stop” sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a “Stop Ahead” (W3-1) sign shall be installed in advance of the “Stop” sign.

The “Stop” sign should be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate. Stop lines that are used to supplement a “Stop” sign should be located at the point where the road user should stop. Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Stop” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Two-Way Stop Control: 
A field investigation is required to determine if a “Stop” sign is to be installed at intersections except as noted in the following “Additional Installation Criteria”. The reviewer should observe the horizontal sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance is available according to [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case A (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]] in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/item_details.aspx?id=1917 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets],latest edition. Also refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for additional guidelines for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28' back to back residential streets.

Multi-Way Stop Control: 
Multi-way “Stop” signs should only be installed if the intersection meets the warrants for a multi-way “Stop” as outlined in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (MUTCD). 24-hour traffic volumes should be collected in order to perform a full warrant analysis. If it is suspected that traffic volumes are minimal from the side street, peak hour turning movement volumes only may be collected as a preliminary analysis. Traffic accident information should also be reviewed for a continuous 12-month period to determine if the accident warrant is met. If the 24-hour or peak hour volumes or accident numbers do not meet the minimum levels as outlined in the warrants for “Stop” signs according to the MUTCD, the multi-way “Stop” sign control will not be recommended for installation.

Additional City of Overland Park Installation Criteria: 
''Conditions for Immediate Justification of “Stop” Sign Installation:''
#On residential streets or collector streets at intersections with major thoroughfares.
#On residential streets at any intersection (3-leg or 4-leg) with collector streets. This also includes cul-de-sac streets with street throats of any length except that “eye-brow” type cul-de-sacs will not require “Stop” signs.
#On private streets, commercial drive entrances or “eye-brow” cul-de-sacs that form the fourth leg of the intersection directly across from a residential or collector street that has “Stop” sign control or is scheduled to have “Stop” sign control.
#On the two minor approaches of residential streets at all four-way residential – residential street intersections in order to assign right-of-way. The minor streets will be determined based on volumes and engineering judgment. Intersections with more than four legs and misaligned intersections will also be signed under this category based on engineering judgment.
#At residential / residential street “T”–intersections when the intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street with no control are not met. The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the AASHTO publication, A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, latest edition. (See the attached exhibits). If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered. According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign shall be installed. (See the “City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of Yield Signs”)
#At other locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic.

''Conditions for Consideration of “Stop” Signs upon Completion of a Traffic Study or Evaluation of a Request:<''br>
#On private streets or commercial drives with long approaches that give the appearance of a public street. This would include locations regardless of whether there is a separate concrete driveway approach apron or not. Engineering judgment is used in making this determination.
#If an existing stop controlled private street or commercial drive is across from a new “uncontrolled” private street or commercial drive, a “Stop” sign may be installed on the new private street or commercial drive.

''Conditions Where “Stop” Signs Will Not Be Installed:<''br>
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action.
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.

Maintenance of Existing “Stop” Signs 
''When Existing “Stop” Signs Do NOT Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#On private streets or commercial drives that do not give the appearance of a through street, any existing signs will be left in place until they get knocked down or need maintenance. At that time, the signs will not be replaced.

''When Existing “Stop” Signs Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#“Stop” signs meeting the above guidelines shall be re-installed immediately upon notification of a knockdown or other required maintenance.

Converting a Multi-Way Stop Control to a Two-Way Stop Control 
The continued need for an existing multi-way stop control may be evaluated by the staff. If the warrants for a multi-way stop as indicated above are not met a proposal will be presented to the Public Works Committee for conversion to a two-way stop control.

== Sign Standards: ==
Size: 
The standard size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign that faces traffic on conventional multi-lane road approaches shall be 36” x 36”.

Where side roads intersect a conventional multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 45 mph or higher, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing the side road approach shall be 36” x 36”, even if the side road has only one approach lane.

Where side roads intersect a multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing traffic on the side road approach shall be 30” x 30” if the side road has a single lane approach and 36” x 36” if the side road has a multi-lane approach.

To assist in determining the proper “Stop” sign size that should be used, see the attached “Flow Chart for Determining Minimum Stop Sign Size” at the end of this document.

The standard size of the “All Way” (R1-3p) plaque shall be 18” x 6”.

Color and Shape: 
The “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be an octagon with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

The “All Way” (R1-3p) sign shall be a rectangle with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==
'''12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer'''
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City. 
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic. 

(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)

=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===
'''12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.'''
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right. 
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance. 

(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP '3, 98; TC-1260 '56, 84)

'''12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.'''
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.

(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 '57, 84)

'''12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.'''
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs. 
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. 
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver's failure to yield right-of-way.

(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)

'''12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.'''
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.

(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 '79, 84)

Template:Resolution 4037

2014-02-05T17:32:49Z

Mike Ross: Created page with "[http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf Resolution No. 4037]"

[http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf Resolution No. 4037]

Stop Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-05T17:32:11Z

Mike Ross: /* Governing Document Reference: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Stop” Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC) 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080, and {{Resolution_4037}}Resolution No. 4037.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered: 
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches; 
:B. Number and angle of approaches; 
:C. Approach speeds; 
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and 
:E. Reported crash experience. 

“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law; 
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or 
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area. 

In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist: 
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day; 
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. 

Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect: 
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes; 
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and 
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic. 

When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be used.

At intersections where all approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs, an “All Way” supplemental plaque (R1-3p) shall be mounted below each “Stop” sign. The “All Way” plaque shall only be used if all intersection approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs.

At intersections where a full stop is not necessary at all times, consideration should first be given to using less restrictive measures such as ”Yield” signs. The use of “Stop” signs on the minor-street approaches should be considered if engineering judgment indicates that a stop is always required because of one or more of the following conditions: 
:A. The vehicular traffic volumes on the through street or highway exceed 6,000 vehicles per day; 
:B. A restricted view exists that requires road users to stop in order to adequately observe conflicting traffic on the through street or highway; and/or 
:C. Crash records indicate that three or more crashes that are susceptible to correction by the installation of a “Stop” sign have been reported within a 12-month period, or that five or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. Such crashes include right-angle collisions involving road users on the minor-street approach failing to yield the right-of-way to traffic on the through street or highway. 

Multi-way Stop Applications 
Multi-way stop control can be useful as a safety measure at intersections if certain traffic conditions exist. Safety concerns associated with multi-way stops include pedestrians, bicyclists, and all road users expecting other road users to stop. Multi-way stop control is used where the volume of traffic on the intersecting roads is approximately equal. The decision to install multi-way stop control should be based on an engineering study. The following criteria should be considered in the engineering study for a multi-way “Stop” sign installation: 
:A. Where traffic control signals are justified, the multi-way stop is an interim measure that can be installed quickly to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of the traffic control signal. 
:B. Five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period that are susceptible to correction by a multi-way stop installation. Such crashes include right-turn and left-turn collisions as well as right-angle collisions. 
:C. Minimum volumes: 
:#The vehicular volume entering the intersection from the major street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 300 vehicles per hour for any 8 hours of an average day; and 
:#The combined vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle volume entering the intersection from the minor street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 200 units per hour for the same 8 hours, with an average delay to minor-street vehicular traffic of at least 30 seconds per vehicle during the highest hour; but 
:#If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants are 70 percent of the values provided in Items 1 and 2 above. 
:D. Where no single criterion is satisfied, but where Criteria B, C.1, and C.2 are all satisfied to 80 percent of the minimum values. Criterion C.3 is excluded from this condition.

Other criteria that may be considered in an engineering study include: 
:A. The need to control left-turn conflicts; 
:B. The need to control vehicle/pedestrian conflicts near locations that generate high pedestrian volumes; 
:C. Locations where a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop; and 
:D. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where multi-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection. 

The “Stop” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the “Stop” sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a “Stop Ahead” (W3-1) sign shall be installed in advance of the “Stop” sign.

The “Stop” sign should be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate. Stop lines that are used to supplement a “Stop” sign should be located at the point where the road user should stop. Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Stop” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Two-Way Stop Control: 
A field investigation is required to determine if a “Stop” sign is to be installed at intersections except as noted in the following “Additional Installation Criteria”. The reviewer should observe the horizontal sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance is available according to [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case A (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]] in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/item_details.aspx?id=1917 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets],latest edition. Also refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for additional guidelines for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28' back to back residential streets.

Multi-Way Stop Control: 
Multi-way “Stop” signs should only be installed if the intersection meets the warrants for a multi-way “Stop” as outlined in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (MUTCD). 24-hour traffic volumes should be collected in order to perform a full warrant analysis. If it is suspected that traffic volumes are minimal from the side street, peak hour turning movement volumes only may be collected as a preliminary analysis. Traffic accident information should also be reviewed for a continuous 12-month period to determine if the accident warrant is met. If the 24-hour or peak hour volumes or accident numbers do not meet the minimum levels as outlined in the warrants for “Stop” signs according to the MUTCD, the multi-way “Stop” sign control will not be recommended for installation.

Additional City of Overland Park Installation Criteria: 
''Conditions for Immediate Justification of “Stop” Sign Installation:''
#On residential streets or collector streets at intersections with major thoroughfares.
#On residential streets at any intersection (3-leg or 4-leg) with collector streets. This also includes cul-de-sac streets with street throats of any length except that “eye-brow” type cul-de-sacs will not require “Stop” signs.
#On private streets, commercial drive entrances or “eye-brow” cul-de-sacs that form the fourth leg of the intersection directly across from a residential or collector street that has “Stop” sign control or is scheduled to have “Stop” sign control.
#On the two minor approaches of residential streets at all four-way residential – residential street intersections in order to assign right-of-way. The minor streets will be determined based on volumes and engineering judgment. Intersections with more than four legs and misaligned intersections will also be signed under this category based on engineering judgment.
#At residential / residential street “T”–intersections when the intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street with no control are not met. The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the AASHTO publication, A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, latest edition. (See the attached exhibits). If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered. According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign shall be installed. (See the “City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of Yield Signs”)
#At other locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic.

''Conditions for Consideration of “Stop” Signs upon Completion of a Traffic Study or Evaluation of a Request:<''br>
#On private streets or commercial drives with long approaches that give the appearance of a public street. This would include locations regardless of whether there is a separate concrete driveway approach apron or not. Engineering judgment is used in making this determination.
#If an existing stop controlled private street or commercial drive is across from a new “uncontrolled” private street or commercial drive, a “Stop” sign may be installed on the new private street or commercial drive.

''Conditions Where “Stop” Signs Will Not Be Installed:<''br>
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action.
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.

Maintenance of Existing “Stop” Signs 
''When Existing “Stop” Signs Do NOT Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#On private streets or commercial drives that do not give the appearance of a through street, any existing signs will be left in place until they get knocked down or need maintenance. At that time, the signs will not be replaced.

''When Existing “Stop” Signs Meet the Above Guidelines:''
#“Stop” signs meeting the above guidelines shall be re-installed immediately upon notification of a knockdown or other required maintenance.

Converting a Multi-Way Stop Control to a Two-Way Stop Control 
The continued need for an existing multi-way stop control may be evaluated by the staff. If the warrants for a multi-way stop as indicated above are not met a proposal will be presented to the Public Works Committee for conversion to a two-way stop control.

== Sign Standards: ==
Size: 
The standard size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign that faces traffic on conventional multi-lane road approaches shall be 36” x 36”.

Where side roads intersect a conventional multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 45 mph or higher, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing the side road approach shall be 36” x 36”, even if the side road has only one approach lane.

Where side roads intersect a multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing traffic on the side road approach shall be 30” x 30” if the side road has a single lane approach and 36” x 36” if the side road has a multi-lane approach.

To assist in determining the proper “Stop” sign size that should be used, see the attached “Flow Chart for Determining Minimum Stop Sign Size” at the end of this document.

The standard size of the “All Way” (R1-3p) plaque shall be 18” x 6”.

Color and Shape: 
The “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be an octagon with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

The “All Way” (R1-3p) sign shall be a rectangle with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.

== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==
'''12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer'''
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City. 
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic. 

(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)

=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===
'''12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.'''
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right. 
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance. 

(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP '3, 98; TC-1260 '56, 84)

'''12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.'''
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.

(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 '57, 84)

'''12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.'''
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs. 
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. 
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it. After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk. If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver's failure to yield right-of-way.

(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)

'''12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.'''
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.

(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 '79, 84)

Do Not Block Intersection Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T21:36:48Z

Mike Ross:

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of
“Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) or “Do Not Block Driveway” Signs''' Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
The “Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) sign, by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), may be installed for avoidance of traffic obstructions.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Appropriate Sign Installation Locations:
• On the major street at multi-way stop or signal controlled intersections where traffic queues tend to back up through the intersection from an adjacent downstream signal or stop controlled intersection. (example: Southbound Antioch at 85th Street). From the intersection of Antioch Road and Santa Fe Drive, southbound Antioch Road traffic backs up through the intersection of 85th Street and Antioch Road.)
• On a major two-lane, undivided street at a non-controlled or stop or yield sign controlled intersection where traffic queues back up from a multi-way or signal controlled intersection. (example: Westbound 87th Street at Mackey). From the intersection of 87th Street and Antioch Road, westbound 87th Street traffic backs up through the intersection of 87th Street and Mackey.)

Inappropriate Sign Installation Locations:
• On the major four-lane or six-lane, divided or undivided streets at a non-controlled or stop or yield controlled intersection where a traffic queue backs up from a multi-way or signal controlled intersection. (example: Southbound Quivira Road at 105th Street)
• At any intersection where sight distance obstructions, either stationary or moving (vehicles) occur and would pose a problem for the side street vehicle.

Reasons for Not Installing Signs:
The City of Overland Park does not make it a standard practice of installing “Do Not Block Intersection” signs on multi-lane streets for several reasons:
1) The sign is difficult to enforce from a police standpoint.
2) Traffic flow can stop quickly and leave following vehicles in the middle of an intersection unintentionally. It is a greater safety issue to have the vehicle back up out of the intersection.
3) The sign also provides a false sense of security to the side street driver. Vehicles in the outside lane of the thoroughfare may stop short of the intersection to allow a driver to exit from the side street. However, there is no guarantee that a vehicle in the inside lane will stop. The stopped vehicle in the outside lane of the thoroughfare then becomes a sight distance obstruction to the side street vehicle, who may pull out across the thoroughfare lanes and become involved in a right angle accident.

The City of Overland Park does not install “Do Not Block Driveway” signs for entrances onto a public street from a private driveway. It is not a standard sign in the MUTCD.

Signing Standards:
The “Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) sign shall have a black legend and border, on a retro-reflectorized white background and be 24” x 30” in size.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:22:43Z

Mike Ross:

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.]

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites.[[File:RS_Park2.png|right]] “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:21:12Z

Mike Ross:

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites.[[File:RS_Park2.png|right]] “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:19:48Z

Mike Ross:

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites.[[File:RS_Park2.png|right]] “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:19:06Z

Mike Ross: /* MUTCD Requirements: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs'''

Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==

Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites.[[File:RS_Park2.png|right]] “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:18:36Z

Mike Ross: /* MUTCD Requirements: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs'''

Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==

Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:18:21Z

Mike Ross: /* MUTCD Requirements: */

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs'''

Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==

Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. [[File:RS_Park.png]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

File:RS Park.png

2014-02-04T20:17:49Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross uploaded a new version of "File:RS Park.png"

Example sign used in design guidance

File:RS Park.png

2014-02-04T20:17:20Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross uploaded a new version of "File:RS Park.png"

Example sign used in design guidance

File:RS Park2.png

2014-02-04T20:16:34Z

Mike Ross: Michaelsross uploaded a new version of "File:RS Park2.png"

File:RS Park2.png

2014-02-04T20:15:13Z

Mike Ross:

File:RS Park.png

2014-02-04T20:14:42Z

Mike Ross: Example sign used in design guidance

Example sign used in design guidance

Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:05:03Z

Mike Ross: Created page with "'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs''' Traffic Services Division of the Department of Publi..."

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs'''

Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), 2009 or latest edition and the Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.

== MUTCD Requirements: ==

Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas. “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.

To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination. This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway. Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.

The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway. The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.

A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route. Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction. Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed. Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.

Traffic Sign Design Guidelines

2014-02-04T20:02:09Z

Mike Ross:

*[[Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Policy|Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs]]

User:Michaelsross

2013-12-20T12:54:17Z

Mike Ross:

Michael S. Ross, P.E.

Manager Technical and Administrative Services

Public Works

Overland Park

User:Michaelsross

2013-12-20T12:54:05Z

Mike Ross: Created page with "Michael S. Ross, P.E. Manager Technical and Administrative Services Public Works Overland Park"

Michael S. Ross, P.E.
Manager Technical and Administrative Services
Public Works
Overland Park

Approved Materials - Fiber Optics

2013-10-07T21:09:50Z

Mike Ross: /* Fiber Optic Cable */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]
{{PQLDisclaimer}}
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-FO-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Cables ==
=== ''Fiber Optic Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.aflglobal.com/Home.aspx/ Alcoa AFL Telecommunications]
|[[media:TRF PQL FO CAT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable.pdf|LE1449CC101N1 – 144 Count LE0729C6101N1 – 72 Count LEO369C5101N1 - 36 Count LE0129C5101N1 – 12 Count LE0069C5101N1 – 6 Count]]
|[[media:TR PQL FO MEM Alcoa AFL Telecommunications.pdf|7/27/2004]]
|[[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable label.jpg|Jacket Label]] [[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable mylar wrap.jpg|Mylar Jacket]] [[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable coiled tubes in jacket.jpg |Cable]]
|-
|
|Chromatic Technologies
|D740L12-144-010X – 144 Count D740L12-72-010X – 72 Count D740L6-36-010X – 36 Count D740L6-12-010X – 12 Count D740L6-06-010X – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM ChromaticTechnologies LooseTubeCable.pdf|10/21/2002]]
|
|-
|
|Corning Cable Systems
|ALTOS All-Dielectric Gel-Free Cables 144EU4-T4101D20 – 144 Count 072EU4-T4101D20 – 72 Count 036EU4-T4101D20 – 36 Count 012EU4-T4101D20 – 12 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM Corning LooseTubeCable.pdf|7/2/2007]]
|
|-
|
|Draka Comteq
|F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-144-E3 – 144 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-072-E3 – 72 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-036-E3 – 36 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-012-E3 – 12 Ct
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM DrakaComteq LooseTubeCable.pdf|8/24/2011]]
|
|-
|
|Mohawk
|M9X509 – 144 Count M9X507 – 72 Count M9X502 – 36 Count M9X511 – 12 Count M9X510 – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM Mohawk LooseTubeCable.pdf|11/3/2005]]
|
|-
|
|Superior Essex||111443101 – 144 Count 110723101 – 72 Count 110363T01 – 36 Count 110123T01 – 12 Count 110063101 – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM SuperiorEssex LooseTubeCable.pdf|4/22/2005]]
|
|}

{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber Non-Armored Loose Tube Cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Plenum Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
||Chromatic Technologies||800T12-144-010X – 144 Count 800T12-72-010X – 72 Count 800T6-36-010X – 36 Count 800S-06-010X – 6 Count||10/21/02|||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Riser Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
||Chromatic Technologies||400T12-72-010X – 72 Count||10/21/02||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Patch Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|ICC||ICFOJ3M302||7/15/08||
|-
|
| Major Custom Cables||FXDSLCST-XM||8/7/09||
|-
|
| Quiktron||810-L27-LLL V-Series 2F LC-ST (Drawing D100855)||8/5/10||

|}
{{PQLNote|ST-LC connectors, 6' duplex, single mode}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''#10 AWG System Tracer Wire'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|-
|
| Cerowire Wire & Cable Co., Inc.||UL file # E15119||5/5/03||
|-
|
| Encore Wire LTD||UL file # E123774||8/1/03||
|-
|
| Essex Group, Inc.||Product Number 070101 UL File # E14656||2/1/01||

|-
|style="background:#fff0f0;"| Closed 9/03
|style="background:#fff0f0;"| Rome||style="background:#fff0f0;"|2020 UL file #13662||style="background:#fff0f0;"|5/5/03||style="background:#fff0f0;"|
|-
|
| Senator / Southwire||Red – 22-97-57 UL file # E23919||5/5/03||
|-
|
| Service Wire||UL file # E105667||5/7/02||
|-

|}

{{PQLNote|Red Insulation Stranded copper #10 AWG THHN 600 volt}}

== Conduit and Couplings ==
==='' HDPE Conduit'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
| Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe||Dura-Line||3” – 3SDR135ORG 2” – 2SDR135ORG||3/28/13||
|}

{{PQLNote|SDR13.5 all sizes Orange color Smooth solid wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''HDPE Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Polywater
||Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Coupling: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10||
|-
|
|Cabletec
|2” – AS 2.375 3” – AS 3.500
|8/2/01||
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06||
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 2” – 1-908353
|10/5/10||
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02||
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Coupling: 
2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|1/9/06||
|}

=== ''Expansion Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/ Cantex]
|[[media:Tr am cc fo Cantex Expansion Coupling.pdf |1” – 5144033 1 ½” – 5144035 2” – 5144036 3” – 5144038 4” – 5144040]]
|[[media:Tr am fo expanisioncoupling cantex approvalmemo.pdf|5/5/03]]||
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Thomas & Betts
|1” – E945F 1 ½” – E945H 2” – E945J 3” – E945L 4” – E945N
|5/26/09||
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Repair Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Thomas & Betts
|Split Duct Coupling 2” – 49011SD-010 3” – 49013SD-010 4” – 49015SD-010
|5/26/09||
|}

{{PQLNote|Used to repair damaged fiber optic conduit when not feasible to remove fiber cable and re-splice}}

== Ethernet Switches ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cisco Systems, Inc
|Switch: IE-3000-8TC Power Supply: PWR-IE50W-AC SFP Fiber Modules: GLC-FE-100LX 100BASE-LX 19” Rack Mount Kit: 
STK-RACKMNT-2955 Patch Cables (ST-LC connectors)
|9/20/13
|[[Media:TRF PQL FO PHOT Cisco EthernetSwitch.jpg|Switch]]
|}

{{PQLNote|Hardened Ethernet Switch w/ DIN Rail Adapter 
8 Ethernet 10/100 Ports & 2 SFP Fiber Ports 
AC Power Converter 
19” Rack Mount Kit 
Two, 6’ Long Duplex Single Mode Fiber patch cables 
(ST-LC connectors)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Locating Materials ==
=== ''Tracer Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Red – 112-3803 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
||
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co.
|Essex
|Product Number 070061 UL file # E14656
|8/21/03
||
|-
|
|Rome Cable Corp
|2020 UL file # E13662
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Red – 22-97-57 UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
||
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
||
|}

{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG}}

==='' Ground Rods'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''

|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat. No. C611380
|4/24/12
||
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611380
|2/27/02
||
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5008
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Josyln
|Cat. No. J-8328
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 8’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Ground Rod Clamp'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12
|2/27/02
||
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” rod 
Part No. HDC34 – ¾” rod
|12/1/05
||
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}

=== ''Conduit Markers'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Carsonite
|CBM206604
|10/23/01
||
|}
{{PQLNote|66” long x 2 ½” min wide Orange in color City provides identification stickers}}

== Ethernet Video Encoders ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|For Maintenance Use Only
|Verint Nextiva
|S1970e-T-XT
|7/12/07
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Product has been Discontinued}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Service Boxes ==
=== ''Type I Fiber Optic Service Box'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001974TAPCX24 (24”x36”x24”)
|7/30/01
||
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-2436-24 – Box only SC30-2436-03 – Cover only SA33-2436-24 – Assembly
|8/8/03
||
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB243624 – Box only CHC2436HF – Cover only PHA2436HF2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
||
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|243624PCB – Box only 2436PCC – Cover only 243624PC - Assembly
|10/17/11
||
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB243624A04 – Box only PCC243605A04 – Cover only
|2/26/02
||
|-
|Carson H Series boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|24366214 – Box only 24364016 – Cover only 24361206 – Assembly 80002029 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
||
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG2436BA24 – Box only PG2436CA0021 – Cover only
|5/05/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Fiber Optics” Cover to be 3” thick Hex head bolts}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Type II Fiber Optic Service Box'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001430TAPCX24 (30”x 48”x 24”)
|7/30/01
||
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-3048-24W – Box only SC30-3048-23W – Cover only SA33-3048-24W – Assembly
|8/8/03
||
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB304824 – Box only CHC3048HF-2PC – Cover only PHA304824HF4 – Assembly
|3/3/11
||
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|304824PCB – Box only 3048PCC – Cover only 304824PC - Assembly
|10/17/11
||
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB304824A04 – Box only PCC304815A04 – Cover only
|2/26/02
||
|-
|Carson H Series boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|30482021 – Box only 30484012 – Cover only 30481620 – Assembly 80002029 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
||
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG3048BA24 – Box only PG3048CC0046 – Cover only
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Fiber Optics” Cover to be 3” thick two-piece underlapping Hex head bolts}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Splice Enclosures ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Corning Cable Systems
|SCF-6C-XX-YY-Z – Single end cap XX = body length (22 = 22 inches or 28 = 28 inches) YY = fiber configuration 
(01=Full slack storage, 02=Reduced slack storage Z = splice tray configuration
 (blank = 0.2” tray height, F = 0.4” tray height) SCF-6T – Double end cap
|7/26/05
||
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics Corporation
|FOSC 450
|10/12/05
||
|-
|
|Windsor Communications
|570-22-AD
|10/12/05
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Bell Type Enclosures}}

== Termination Drop Cables ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Fiber Connections, Inc.
|Gator Patch 6 Fiber – G320G006FRB-Length 12 Fiber – G620G012FRB-Length
|1/10/06
||
|-
|
|Major Custom Cable
|Z-Stack 6 Fiber – FCZS6ASTUB 12 Fiber – FCZS12ASTUB
|3/23/09
||
|}
{{PQLNote|6 or 12-Fiber – Single mode 6 or 12 port rack mount for ST connectors}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Terminal Servers ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Comtrol Network Enabling Devices
|DeviceMaster RTS 1-Port Part Number 99000-0
|9/1/05
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Port Supply with 6’ CAT 5e Network Patch Cable}}

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

Approved Materials - Fiber Optics

2013-10-07T21:09:09Z

Mike Ross: /* Fiber Optic Cable */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]
{{PQLDisclaimer}}
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-FO-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Cables ==
=== ''Fiber Optic Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.aflglobal.com/Home.aspx/ Alcoa AFL Telecommunications]
|[[media:TRF PQL FO CAT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable.pdf|LE1449CC101N1 – 144 Count LE0729C6101N1 – 72 Count LEO369C5101N1 - 36]] Count LE0129C5101N1 – 12 Count LE0069C5101N1 – 6 Count
|[[media:TR PQL FO MEM Alcoa AFL Telecommunications.pdf|7/27/2004]]
|[[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable label.jpg|Jacket Label]] [[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable mylar wrap.jpg|Mylar Jacket]] [[media:TRF PQL FO PHOT AlcoaAFL LooseTubeCable coiled tubes in jacket.jpg |Cable]]
|-
|
|Chromatic Technologies
|D740L12-144-010X – 144 Count D740L12-72-010X – 72 Count D740L6-36-010X – 36 Count D740L6-12-010X – 12 Count D740L6-06-010X – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM ChromaticTechnologies LooseTubeCable.pdf|10/21/2002]]
|
|-
|
|Corning Cable Systems
|ALTOS All-Dielectric Gel-Free Cables 144EU4-T4101D20 – 144 Count 072EU4-T4101D20 – 72 Count 036EU4-T4101D20 – 36 Count 012EU4-T4101D20 – 12 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM Corning LooseTubeCable.pdf|7/2/2007]]
|
|-
|
|Draka Comteq
|F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-144-E3 – 144 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-072-E3 – 72 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-036-E3 – 36 Ct F-ETH1JKT-12-ES-012-E3 – 12 Ct
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM DrakaComteq LooseTubeCable.pdf|8/24/2011]]
|
|-
|
|Mohawk
|M9X509 – 144 Count M9X507 – 72 Count M9X502 – 36 Count M9X511 – 12 Count M9X510 – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM Mohawk LooseTubeCable.pdf|11/3/2005]]
|
|-
|
|Superior Essex||111443101 – 144 Count 110723101 – 72 Count 110363T01 – 36 Count 110123T01 – 12 Count 110063101 – 6 Count
|[[media:TRF PQL FO MEM SuperiorEssex LooseTubeCable.pdf|4/22/2005]]
|
|}

{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber Non-Armored Loose Tube Cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Plenum Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
||Chromatic Technologies||800T12-144-010X – 144 Count 800T12-72-010X – 72 Count 800T6-36-010X – 36 Count 800S-06-010X – 6 Count||10/21/02|||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Riser Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
||Chromatic Technologies||400T12-72-010X – 72 Count||10/21/02||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Mode Fiber}}

=== ''Fiber Optic Patch Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|ICC||ICFOJ3M302||7/15/08||
|-
|
| Major Custom Cables||FXDSLCST-XM||8/7/09||
|-
|
| Quiktron||810-L27-LLL V-Series 2F LC-ST (Drawing D100855)||8/5/10||

|}
{{PQLNote|ST-LC connectors, 6' duplex, single mode}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''#10 AWG System Tracer Wire'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|-
|
| Cerowire Wire & Cable Co., Inc.||UL file # E15119||5/5/03||
|-
|
| Encore Wire LTD||UL file # E123774||8/1/03||
|-
|
| Essex Group, Inc.||Product Number 070101 UL File # E14656||2/1/01||

|-
|style="background:#fff0f0;"| Closed 9/03
|style="background:#fff0f0;"| Rome||style="background:#fff0f0;"|2020 UL file #13662||style="background:#fff0f0;"|5/5/03||style="background:#fff0f0;"|
|-
|
| Senator / Southwire||Red – 22-97-57 UL file # E23919||5/5/03||
|-
|
| Service Wire||UL file # E105667||5/7/02||
|-

|}

{{PQLNote|Red Insulation Stranded copper #10 AWG THHN 600 volt}}

== Conduit and Couplings ==
==='' HDPE Conduit'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
| Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe||Dura-Line||3” – 3SDR135ORG 2” – 2SDR135ORG||3/28/13||
|}

{{PQLNote|SDR13.5 all sizes Orange color Smooth solid wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''HDPE Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Polywater
||Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Coupling: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10||
|-
|
|Cabletec
|2” – AS 2.375 3” – AS 3.500
|8/2/01||
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06||
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 2” – 1-908353
|10/5/10||
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02||
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Coupling: 
2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|1/9/06||
|}

=== ''Expansion Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/ Cantex]
|[[media:Tr am cc fo Cantex Expansion Coupling.pdf |1” – 5144033 1 ½” – 5144035 2” – 5144036 3” – 5144038 4” – 5144040]]
|[[media:Tr am fo expanisioncoupling cantex approvalmemo.pdf|5/5/03]]||
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Thomas & Betts
|1” – E945F 1 ½” – E945H 2” – E945J 3” – E945L 4” – E945N
|5/26/09||
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Repair Couplings'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Thomas & Betts
|Split Duct Coupling 2” – 49011SD-010 3” – 49013SD-010 4” – 49015SD-010
|5/26/09||
|}

{{PQLNote|Used to repair damaged fiber optic conduit when not feasible to remove fiber cable and re-splice}}

== Ethernet Switches ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cisco Systems, Inc
|Switch: IE-3000-8TC Power Supply: PWR-IE50W-AC SFP Fiber Modules: GLC-FE-100LX 100BASE-LX 19” Rack Mount Kit: 
STK-RACKMNT-2955 Patch Cables (ST-LC connectors)
|9/20/13
|[[Media:TRF PQL FO PHOT Cisco EthernetSwitch.jpg|Switch]]
|}

{{PQLNote|Hardened Ethernet Switch w/ DIN Rail Adapter 
8 Ethernet 10/100 Ports & 2 SFP Fiber Ports 
AC Power Converter 
19” Rack Mount Kit 
Two, 6’ Long Duplex Single Mode Fiber patch cables 
(ST-LC connectors)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Locating Materials ==
=== ''Tracer Cable'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Red – 112-3803 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
||
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co.
|Essex
|Product Number 070061 UL file # E14656
|8/21/03
||
|-
|
|Rome Cable Corp
|2020 UL file # E13662
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Red – 22-97-57 UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
||
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
||
|}

{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG}}

==='' Ground Rods'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''

|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat. No. C611380
|4/24/12
||
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611380
|2/27/02
||
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5008
|5/5/03
||
|-
|
|Josyln
|Cat. No. J-8328
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 8’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Ground Rod Clamp'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12
|2/27/02
||
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” rod 
Part No. HDC34 – ¾” rod
|12/1/05
||
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}

=== ''Conduit Markers'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Carsonite
|CBM206604
|10/23/01
||
|}
{{PQLNote|66” long x 2 ½” min wide Orange in color City provides identification stickers}}

== Ethernet Video Encoders ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|For Maintenance Use Only
|Verint Nextiva
|S1970e-T-XT
|7/12/07
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Product has been Discontinued}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Service Boxes ==
=== ''Type I Fiber Optic Service Box'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001974TAPCX24 (24”x36”x24”)
|7/30/01
||
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-2436-24 – Box only SC30-2436-03 – Cover only SA33-2436-24 – Assembly
|8/8/03
||
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB243624 – Box only CHC2436HF – Cover only PHA2436HF2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
||
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|243624PCB – Box only 2436PCC – Cover only 243624PC - Assembly
|10/17/11
||
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB243624A04 – Box only PCC243605A04 – Cover only
|2/26/02
||
|-
|Carson H Series boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|24366214 – Box only 24364016 – Cover only 24361206 – Assembly 80002029 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
||
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG2436BA24 – Box only PG2436CA0021 – Cover only
|5/05/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Fiber Optics” Cover to be 3” thick Hex head bolts}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== ''Type II Fiber Optic Service Box'' ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001430TAPCX24 (30”x 48”x 24”)
|7/30/01
||
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-3048-24W – Box only SC30-3048-23W – Cover only SA33-3048-24W – Assembly
|8/8/03
||
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB304824 – Box only CHC3048HF-2PC – Cover only PHA304824HF4 – Assembly
|3/3/11
||
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|304824PCB – Box only 3048PCC – Cover only 304824PC - Assembly
|10/17/11
||
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB304824A04 – Box only PCC304815A04 – Cover only
|2/26/02
||
|-
|Carson H Series boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|30482021 – Box only 30484012 – Cover only 30481620 – Assembly 80002029 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
||
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG3048BA24 – Box only PG3048CC0046 – Cover only
|5/5/03
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Fiber Optics” Cover to be 3” thick two-piece underlapping Hex head bolts}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Splice Enclosures ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Corning Cable Systems
|SCF-6C-XX-YY-Z – Single end cap XX = body length (22 = 22 inches or 28 = 28 inches) YY = fiber configuration 
(01=Full slack storage, 02=Reduced slack storage Z = splice tray configuration
 (blank = 0.2” tray height, F = 0.4” tray height) SCF-6T – Double end cap
|7/26/05
||
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics Corporation
|FOSC 450
|10/12/05
||
|-
|
|Windsor Communications
|570-22-AD
|10/12/05
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Bell Type Enclosures}}

== Termination Drop Cables ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Fiber Connections, Inc.
|Gator Patch 6 Fiber – G320G006FRB-Length 12 Fiber – G620G012FRB-Length
|1/10/06
||
|-
|
|Major Custom Cable
|Z-Stack 6 Fiber – FCZS6ASTUB 12 Fiber – FCZS12ASTUB
|3/23/09
||
|}
{{PQLNote|6 or 12-Fiber – Single mode 6 or 12 port rack mount for ST connectors}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Terminal Servers ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Comtrol Network Enabling Devices
|DeviceMaster RTS 1-Port Part Number 99000-0
|9/1/05
||
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Port Supply with 6’ CAT 5e Network Patch Cable}}

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2013-10-02T17:47:59Z

Mike Ross: /* Warning Lights */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-TC-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

== Arrow Panels ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|National Signal
|Aro-Lite Curve
|3/14/05
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Sentinel AB-0715 – Arrow (15-light) AB-0725 – Chevrons (25-light)
|3/26/13
|
|-
|
|Wanco, Inc.
|Traffic Director WTSP75-LSAC – Chevron (25-light) WTSP75-LSA – Arrow (15-light)
|3/14/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|70 to 80 Watt 25-light Sequential Chevron OR 15-light Flashing Arrow}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Barricades ==
=== Type I Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type II Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type III Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Davidson Traffic Control Products
|T3B Barricade – Type 9 Prismatic HI (VIP DG)
|11/8/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|The Wave – Centerboard The Mast – Upright Anchor Base – Base
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Intensity Prismatic Sheeting}}

=== ADA Pedestrian Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Safety Wall
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Continuous smooth upper rail No gaps between sections Vertical plane without obstructions Lower rail 2” or less above ground Upper rail not less than 32” high}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Changeable Message Signs ==

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Addco
|Model DH 1000 ALS
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|National Signal
|Sunray 480
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Messenger Model MB-1548
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|3 Lines of text 8 Characters per line}}

== Channelizing Devices ==
=== Conical Delineator/Trim Line Cone ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Diverter
|11/9/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Navigator Channelizer
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Grabber Cone 4226-CRU-16DGDG Looper Cone 46266-CRU-30DG
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|42” Tall 2 – 6” Fluorescent Orange Prismatic Bands 2 – 6” White High Intensity Bands}}

=== Drums ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Director
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|LifeGard Traffic Drum LifeGard II Traffic Drum
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 18000
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Prismatic Sheeting}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Inertial Barrier Systems ==
=== Sand Barrels ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Energy Absorption Systems, Inc.
|Energite III
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Sand Filled Contnainers}}

== Sign Sheeting ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Avery Dennison
|Fluorescent Orange – W-7514 High Intensity White – T-6500
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|3M
|Fluorescent Orange – 3924S High Intensity White – 3930
|7/23/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Orange: Prismatic Sheeting (VIII) White: High Intensity Sheeting (Type IV)}}

== Sign Stands ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gun-Ko
|GK-1 – A-Frame w/30”x24” sign GK-2 – A-Fame w/48”x48” sign GK-3 – Upright supports w/ 48”x48” sign
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|Traffix Devices Inc.
|Big Buster 48”x48”
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|United Rentals Highway Technologies
|Lo Pro 350 Series 20 Lo Pro 350 Series 40 High Pro 350
|7/23/13
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Temporary Markings ==
=== Waterborne Paint ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Ennis Paint
|EF Series Fast Dry
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Removable Tape ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Director 2
|3/9/12
|
|}

=== Non-removable Tape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Visa Line
|3/9/12
|
|}

== Warning Lights ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Empco-Lite
|Model 499L3 Type B / 747A LED Type A / 100 LED Model 212 B-Lite
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2013-10-02T17:47:52Z

Mike Ross: /* Sign Stands */

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2013-10-02T17:47:44Z

Mike Ross: /* Drums */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-TC-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

== Arrow Panels ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|National Signal
|Aro-Lite Curve
|3/14/05
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Sentinel AB-0715 – Arrow (15-light) AB-0725 – Chevrons (25-light)
|3/26/13
|
|-
|
|Wanco, Inc.
|Traffic Director WTSP75-LSAC – Chevron (25-light) WTSP75-LSA – Arrow (15-light)
|3/14/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|70 to 80 Watt 25-light Sequential Chevron OR 15-light Flashing Arrow}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Barricades ==
=== Type I Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type II Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type III Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Davidson Traffic Control Products
|T3B Barricade – Type 9 Prismatic HI (VIP DG)
|11/8/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|The Wave – Centerboard The Mast – Upright Anchor Base – Base
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Intensity Prismatic Sheeting}}

=== ADA Pedestrian Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Safety Wall
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Continuous smooth upper rail No gaps between sections Vertical plane without obstructions Lower rail 2” or less above ground Upper rail not less than 32” high}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Changeable Message Signs ==

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Addco
|Model DH 1000 ALS
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|National Signal
|Sunray 480
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Messenger Model MB-1548
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|3 Lines of text 8 Characters per line}}

== Channelizing Devices ==
=== Conical Delineator/Trim Line Cone ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Diverter
|11/9/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Navigator Channelizer
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Grabber Cone 4226-CRU-16DGDG Looper Cone 46266-CRU-30DG
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|42” Tall 2 – 6” Fluorescent Orange Prismatic Bands 2 – 6” White High Intensity Bands}}

=== Drums ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Director
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|LifeGard Traffic Drum LifeGard II Traffic Drum
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 18000
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Prismatic Sheeting}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Inertial Barrier Systems ==
=== Sand Barrels ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Energy Absorption Systems, Inc.
|Energite III
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Sand Filled Contnainers}}

== Sign Sheeting ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Avery Dennison
|Fluorescent Orange – W-7514 High Intensity White – T-6500
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|3M
|Fluorescent Orange – 3924S High Intensity White – 3930
|7/23/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Orange: Prismatic Sheeting (VIII) White: High Intensity Sheeting (Type IV)}}

== Sign Stands ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gun-Ko
|GK-1 – A-Frame w/30”x24” sign GK-2 – A-Fame w/48”x48” sign GK-3 – Upright supports w/ 48”x48” sign
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|Traffix Devices Inc.
|Big Buster 48”x48”
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|United Rentals Highway Technologies
|Lo Pro 350 Series 20 Lo Pro 350 Series 40 High Pro 350
|7/23/13
|
|}

== Temporary Markings ==
=== Waterborne Paint ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Ennis Paint
|EF Series Fast Dry
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Removable Tape ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Director 2
|3/9/12
|
|}

=== Non-removable Tape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Visa Line
|3/9/12
|
|}

== Warning Lights ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Empco-Lite
|Model 499L3 Type B / 747A LED Type A / 100 LED Model 212 B-Lite
|7/24/13
|
|}

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2013-10-02T17:47:35Z

Mike Ross: /* ADA Pedestrian Barricades */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-TC-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

== Arrow Panels ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|National Signal
|Aro-Lite Curve
|3/14/05
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Sentinel AB-0715 – Arrow (15-light) AB-0725 – Chevrons (25-light)
|3/26/13
|
|-
|
|Wanco, Inc.
|Traffic Director WTSP75-LSAC – Chevron (25-light) WTSP75-LSA – Arrow (15-light)
|3/14/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|70 to 80 Watt 25-light Sequential Chevron OR 15-light Flashing Arrow}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Barricades ==
=== Type I Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type II Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type III Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Davidson Traffic Control Products
|T3B Barricade – Type 9 Prismatic HI (VIP DG)
|11/8/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|The Wave – Centerboard The Mast – Upright Anchor Base – Base
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Intensity Prismatic Sheeting}}

=== ADA Pedestrian Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Safety Wall
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Continuous smooth upper rail No gaps between sections Vertical plane without obstructions Lower rail 2” or less above ground Upper rail not less than 32” high}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Changeable Message Signs ==

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Addco
|Model DH 1000 ALS
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|National Signal
|Sunray 480
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Messenger Model MB-1548
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|3 Lines of text 8 Characters per line}}

== Channelizing Devices ==
=== Conical Delineator/Trim Line Cone ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Diverter
|11/9/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Navigator Channelizer
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Grabber Cone 4226-CRU-16DGDG Looper Cone 46266-CRU-30DG
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|42” Tall 2 – 6” Fluorescent Orange Prismatic Bands 2 – 6” White High Intensity Bands}}

=== Drums ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Director
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|LifeGard Traffic Drum LifeGard II Traffic Drum
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 18000
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Prismatic Sheeting}}

== Inertial Barrier Systems ==
=== Sand Barrels ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Energy Absorption Systems, Inc.
|Energite III
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Sand Filled Contnainers}}

== Sign Sheeting ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Avery Dennison
|Fluorescent Orange – W-7514 High Intensity White – T-6500
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|3M
|Fluorescent Orange – 3924S High Intensity White – 3930
|7/23/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Orange: Prismatic Sheeting (VIII) White: High Intensity Sheeting (Type IV)}}

== Sign Stands ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gun-Ko
|GK-1 – A-Frame w/30”x24” sign GK-2 – A-Fame w/48”x48” sign GK-3 – Upright supports w/ 48”x48” sign
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|Traffix Devices Inc.
|Big Buster 48”x48”
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|United Rentals Highway Technologies
|Lo Pro 350 Series 20 Lo Pro 350 Series 40 High Pro 350
|7/23/13
|
|}

== Temporary Markings ==
=== Waterborne Paint ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Ennis Paint
|EF Series Fast Dry
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Removable Tape ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Director 2
|3/9/12
|
|}

=== Non-removable Tape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Visa Line
|3/9/12
|
|}

== Warning Lights ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Empco-Lite
|Model 499L3 Type B / 747A LED Type A / 100 LED Model 212 B-Lite
|7/24/13
|
|}

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2013-10-02T17:47:26Z

Mike Ross: /* Arrow Panels */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-TC-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

== Arrow Panels ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|National Signal
|Aro-Lite Curve
|3/14/05
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Sentinel AB-0715 – Arrow (15-light) AB-0725 – Chevrons (25-light)
|3/26/13
|
|-
|
|Wanco, Inc.
|Traffic Director WTSP75-LSAC – Chevron (25-light) WTSP75-LSA – Arrow (15-light)
|3/14/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|70 to 80 Watt 25-light Sequential Chevron OR 15-light Flashing Arrow}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Barricades ==
=== Type I Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type II Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 35000
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Type III Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Davidson Traffic Control Products
|T3B Barricade – Type 9 Prismatic HI (VIP DG)
|11/8/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|The Wave – Centerboard The Mast – Upright Anchor Base – Base
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Intensity Prismatic Sheeting}}

=== ADA Pedestrian Barricades ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Safety Wall
|11/8/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Continuous smooth upper rail No gaps between sections Vertical plane without obstructions Lower rail 2” or less above ground Upper rail not less than 32” high}}

== Changeable Message Signs ==

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Addco
|Model DH 1000 ALS
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|National Signal
|Sunray 480
|7/24/13
|
|-
|
|Solar Technology, Inc.
|Silent Messenger Model MB-1548
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|3 Lines of text 8 Characters per line}}

== Channelizing Devices ==
=== Conical Delineator/Trim Line Cone ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Diverter
|11/9/12
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|Navigator Channelizer
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Grabber Cone 4226-CRU-16DGDG Looper Cone 46266-CRU-30DG
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|42” Tall 2 – 6” Fluorescent Orange Prismatic Bands 2 – 6” White High Intensity Bands}}

=== Drums ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lakeside Plastics, Inc.
|The Director
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|Plastic Safety Systems
|LifeGard Traffic Drum LifeGard II Traffic Drum
|2/26/13
|
|-
|
|TrafFix Devices, Inc.
|Series 18000
|2/26/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|High Prismatic Sheeting}}

== Inertial Barrier Systems ==
=== Sand Barrels ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Energy Absorption Systems, Inc.
|Energite III
|7/24/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Sand Filled Contnainers}}

== Sign Sheeting ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Avery Dennison
|Fluorescent Orange – W-7514 High Intensity White – T-6500
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|3M
|Fluorescent Orange – 3924S High Intensity White – 3930
|7/23/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Orange: Prismatic Sheeting (VIII) White: High Intensity Sheeting (Type IV)}}

== Sign Stands ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gun-Ko
|GK-1 – A-Frame w/30”x24” sign GK-2 – A-Fame w/48”x48” sign GK-3 – Upright supports w/ 48”x48” sign
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|Traffix Devices Inc.
|Big Buster 48”x48”
|7/23/13
|
|-
|
|United Rentals Highway Technologies
|Lo Pro 350 Series 20 Lo Pro 350 Series 40 High Pro 350
|7/23/13
|
|}

== Temporary Markings ==
=== Waterborne Paint ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Ennis Paint
|EF Series Fast Dry
|7/24/13
|
|}

=== Removable Tape ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Director 2
|3/9/12
|
|}

=== Non-removable Tape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Swarco Industries
|Visa Line
|3/9/12
|
|}

== Warning Lights ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Empco-Lite
|Model 499L3 Type B / 747A LED Type A / 100 LED Model 212 B-Lite
|7/24/13
|
|}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2013-10-02T17:47:03Z

Mike Ross: /* Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==

=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Precision Form, Inc.
|PFI-200-1A Breakaway Couplings
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Hapco
|AASHTO No. TB6-9”–10 ½” to 12½” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79402 – 4/4/98 AASHTO No. TB5-9”–14 ½” to 15¼” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79236 – 1/4/00
|8/15/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Valmont
|CS-300 – Up to 12” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB6-9 Dwg # KS-90 – 5/14/03 CS-370 – 14 ½” to 15” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB5-9 Dwg # KS-91 w/ Rev 1
|6/20/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==
=== Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 060062C
|8/21/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|Bare-CU-SD-6-7SOL
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Soft Drawn Bare Solid Copper #6 AWG}}

=== Distribution Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Black – 112-3801 Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
|
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co. 9/5/2001
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 070101 UL file # E14656
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co.
|Red – 22-97-57 Black – 22-97-32 Green – 22-97-xx UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Black – 325370 (500’ reel) Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Green – 325379 (500’ reel) Black – 325573 (2,500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) Green – 325580 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG Color Coded Red and Black Green for ground cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Electrical Service Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|1” – A52BA12 2” – A52CA12
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Certain Teed
|1” – 27213 1 ½” – 27413 2” – 27513 3” – 27713 4” – 27913
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|1” – 511010 – 10’ or 511020 – 20’ 1 ½” – 511510 – 10’ or 511520 – 20’ 2” – 512010 – 10’ or 512020 – 20’ 3” – 513010 – 10’ or 513020– 20’ 4” – 514010 – 10’ or 515020 – 20’
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Prime Conduit
|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length)
|5/26/09
|
|-
|
|Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe
|2” – 502010U – 10’ or 502020U – 20’ 3” – 503010U – 10’ or 503020U – 20’ 4” – 504010U – 10’ or 504020U – 20’
|4/7/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|
Schedule 40 PVC
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 6141625  2” – 6141628 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power:(Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 5133820 / 5233930 '''90º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133825 / 5233825  2” – 5133828 / 5233828 '''45º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133765 / 5233765  2” – 5133768 / 5233768 '''30º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133745 / 5233745  2” – 5133748 / 5233748
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 610002  2” – 610005 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 611392 / 611142 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611002 / 611058  2” – 611005 / 611061 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611016 / 611071  2” – 611019 / 611074 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611030 / 611085  2” – 611033 / 611088
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – EC20 / 077003  2” – EC35 / 077006 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 068767 / 068058 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068582 / 068422  2” – 068585 / 068425 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068602 / 068563  2” – 068605 / 068566 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068622 / EE2030  2” – 068625 / EE3530
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Plastic Trends / Royal Pipe Systems
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E010100  2” – E010200 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – E07530036 / E07930036 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – E018100 / E021100 2” – E018200 / E021200 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E019100 / E022100  2” – E019200 / E022200 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E020100 / E072100  2” – E020200 / E072200
|1/8/10
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Prime Conduit
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E940F  2” – E940J '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – UA9FL / UA9FLB '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB  2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB  2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB  2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB
|5/26/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40 PVC}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135GRY 3” – 3SDR135GRY
|3/28/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 all sizes Gray color Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED
|3/8/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with red stripes Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Ploywater
|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10
|
|-
|
|Cabletec
|AS 2.375 – 2” AS 3.500 – 3”
|8/2/01
|
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06
|
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 1-908353 – 2”
|10/5/10
|
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02
|
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” – 6202005
|1/9/06
|
|}

== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Purchased by Hubbell
|Connector MFG.Co.
|CMC SLK-112 I
|1/11/01
|
|rowspan="3"|6061-T6 aluminum Provide rubber boot cover – black plastisol
|-
|
|Durham Company
|9205159
|8/22/13
|
|-
|
|Fargo Mfg. Company, Inc subsidiary of Hubbell Inc.
|Fargo GO-32
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Polaris
|SLCS4A-4P
|9/21/07
|
|Coated w/ allen head screw – does not need rubber boot
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal Industries purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 20 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line non-fused 600 volt, 30 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 65 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line fused 600 volt, 8 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fuses ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bussmann Circuit Protection, Worldwide
|Limitron Type KTK8
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Ferraz Shawmut
|ATM-8
|1/25/02
|
|-
|
|Littelfuse
|KLK-8
|7/31/01
|
|}
{{PQLNote|600 volt, 8 amp}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Splice Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|'''Split-Bolt Connectors''' KS15 - #10 STR to #8 STR KS20 - #8 STR to #4 STR KS22 - #6 STR to #3 STR KS23 - #6 STR to #2 STR KS25 - #4 STR to #1/0 STR '''Copper Compression Tees''' YST4C4C - #4 STR to #4 STR
|5/5/03
|
|
|-
|
|NSI Industries Polaris Blue
|ISW-4 - #4 two-port in-line splice ITW-4 - #4 two port IPLW4-3 - #4 three port IPLW4-3 - #4 four port
|9/11/07
|
|Waterproof/submersible
|}

== Control Centers ==
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|CP3B91115PAOOP4
|4/8/11
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MEUG16AR-M100-OPK
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP16R-M2100-112C-AL-OPK
|2/3/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover with horn bypass and exposed meter}}

=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|Pending approval
|
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MET2-VLM-LTS-R
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-LT-PM
|2/17/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover and horn bypass with mounting collar for stand alone unit.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==

=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat No. C611300
|4/24/12
|
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611300 – ½” x 10’ Cat. No. 613400 – ¾” x 10’
|2/27/02
|
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5010
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Joslyn
|Cat No. J-8330
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Knight
|GRC 1210
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 10’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12 – ½” GRC34 – ¾”
|2/27/02
|
|-
|

|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” Part No. HDC34 – ¾”
|12/1/05
|
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type I Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001423TA (12” x 12” x 12”)
|1/11/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1212-12 – Box only SC30-1212-02 – Cover only SA33-1212-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB121212 – Box only CHC1212SL – Cover only PHA121212SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|121212PCB – Box only 1212PCC – Cover only 121212PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|

|New Basis
|PCB121212A04 – Box only PCC121212A04 – Cover only PCA121212A4009 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|12122001 – Box only 12124006– Cover only 12121003 w/ 12124006 “Street Lighting” – Assembly 80002052 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PC1212BA12 – Box only PC1212CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be ¾” thick (CDR is 1 ½” thick) Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Type II Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001429TA (11”x18”x12”)
|7/30/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1118-12 – Box only SC30-1118-02 – Cover only SA33-1118-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB111812 – Box only CHC1118SL – Cover only PHA111812SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|111812PCB – Box only 1118PCC – Cover only 111812PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB111812A04 – Box only PCC111812A04 – Cover only PCA111812A866 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|11182001 – Box only 11184007 – Cover only 11181617 – Assembly 80002033 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG1118BA12 – Box only PG1118CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be 1 ¾” to 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Lamps ==
=== High Pressure Sodium ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|General Electric
|Lucalox – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/ECO/NC – 14673 150 W – LU150/55/ECO/NC – 40390 250 W – LU250/ECO/NC – 14674 400 W – LU400/ECO/NC – 14675
|11/4/10
|
|-
|
|Phillips
|100 W – C100S54/ALTO/NC – 14740-5 150 W – C150S55/ALTO/NC – 14741-3 250 W – C250S50/ALTO/NC – 14742-1 400 W – C400S51/ALTO/NC – 14743-9
|10/14/11
|
|-
|
|Sylvania
|Lumalux PLUS/ECO – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/PLUS/ECO – 67559 150 W – LU150/55/PLUS/ECO – 67494 250 W – LU250/PLUS/ECO – 67572 400 W – LU400/PLUS/ECO – 67312
|3/26/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Clear lamp Mogul base ECO/ALTO = Low Mercury NC = Non Cycling 30,000+ Hour Average Life}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Luminaires ==
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 150:AE7361-70fg3.ies 250 & 400: AEL12963.ies
|American Electric Lighting – Acuity Brands
|31515SCAMT2R3FGM2NRHPAR8663 – 150W HPS 32525SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 250W HPS 32540SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 400W HPS
|4/28/05 4/15/05
|
|-
|Photometric Curves 150: GE7285.ies 250 & 400: GE1002.ies or GE7323.ies
|General Electric
|M2AC15S0A1GMC31347 – 150W HPS MDCA25S0A12FMC31 – 250W HPS MDCA40S0A12FMC31 – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|-
|150 & 250: HP03116.ies 400: HP03065.ies
|Hubbell
|RMCD15S38031125F0M53-150W RMCD25S38031125F0M53-250W RLCD40S38031125F0M53-400 W
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2-Bolt slip fitter connection for 150 W fixtures 4-Bolt slip fitter connection large housing for 250 W and 400 W fixtures Multi-Tap Ballast Plug-In “Protected” starter Aluminum wildlife guard NO PHOTOCELL}}

=== Highway Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curve 400W: 452580.ies
|General Electric
|RPFT40S0A1GLN4GR – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Residential Post Top ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 100 & 150 W: 42737
|Holophane
|PTU-10DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 100 W PTU-15DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 150 W
|2/14/03
|
|-
|Photometric Curves mpb15s3a – Type 3 mpb15sa – Type 5
|Sentry
|SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-150HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLSF –Type 5
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Multi-Tap Ballast}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Dark To Light (DTL)
|DP124-0.2-1821
|3/27/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120Volt, Turn on at 0.2 Fc Silicon Chip}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # B84165-001 – Type OP301 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B84165-002 – Type OP301 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-001 – Type OP302 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B84165-003 – Type OP303 w/twin single member 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-005 – w/twin 8’ truss arms – 10/04 Rev 2 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-71 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-72 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-73 – Type OP303 w/Rev 2 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP303 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 and KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.188” Wall Thickness Cable hook at top of pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # 84165-004 – Type OP401 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # 84165-005 – Type OP401 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-002 – Type OP402 w/single 10’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-003 – Type OP402 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-004 – Type OP402 w/single 15’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # 80061-001 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ & 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-002 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-003 Type OP403 w/twin 15’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-004 Type OP403 w/twin 10’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-74 – Type OP401w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-75 – Type OP402 w/Rev 3 Dwg # KS-76 – Type OP403 w/Rev 3 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP401 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP402 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-88 – Type OP403 w/Rev 1 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 & KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.219” Wall Thickness}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Information Contained on Pole Drawings.
|9/3/03
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''Arms:''' Dwg # KS-77 – 6’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-78 – 8’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-79 – 8’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-80 – 10’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-81 – 12’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-82 – 15’ Truss – 5/14/03 '''Arm Attachment:''' Dwg # KS-83 – Single w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-84 – Truss w/Rev 1
|11/29/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Supply end cap on lower truss member. Labeled with identification tag.}}

=== Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg # A66338 w/Rev # 10 – 4/08
|4/23/08
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg # KS-70 – Type OP14 w/Rev 5 Dwg # KS-85 – Handhole w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-89 – ID Detail
|4/23/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening. Handhole should be smooth and free of burrs. Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.156” Wall Thickness}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|T112-0363 – R OP14 T112-0748 – T1 OP301/302/303 T112-02930101 – F1 OP401/402 T112-02940101 – F2 OP403
|2/20/06
|
|-
|
|Dixie
|D-1202-0029-A – R OP14 D-1202-0465-A – T1 OP301/302/303 D-1202-0031-A – F1 OP401/402 D-1202-0032-A – F2 OP403
|4/10/13
|
|-
|
|Earth Contact Products
|LPS-66T-048-12 – R OP14 LPS-66T-060-12 – T1 OP301/302/303 LPS-86T-60A-14 – F1 OP401/402 LPS-86T-60B-14 – F2 OP403
|10/15/12
|
|-
|
|JH Botts, Inc.
|Dwg # JHBOPK-1 w/Rev A
|8/20/03
|
|-
|
|Pelco
|SK-1094-1 Rev C – R OP14 SK-1109-1 Rev B – T1 OP301/302/303 SK-1108-1 Rev B – F1 OP401/402 SK-1095-1 Rev E – F2 OP403
|7/19/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Manufacturer and foundation identification stenciled on base plate with ¼” to ½” lettering.}}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2013-10-02T17:46:53Z

Mike Ross: /* Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==

=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Precision Form, Inc.
|PFI-200-1A Breakaway Couplings
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Hapco
|AASHTO No. TB6-9”–10 ½” to 12½” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79402 – 4/4/98 AASHTO No. TB5-9”–14 ½” to 15¼” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79236 – 1/4/00
|8/15/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Valmont
|CS-300 – Up to 12” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB6-9 Dwg # KS-90 – 5/14/03 CS-370 – 14 ½” to 15” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB5-9 Dwg # KS-91 w/ Rev 1
|6/20/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==
=== Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 060062C
|8/21/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|Bare-CU-SD-6-7SOL
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Soft Drawn Bare Solid Copper #6 AWG}}

=== Distribution Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Black – 112-3801 Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
|
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co. 9/5/2001
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 070101 UL file # E14656
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co.
|Red – 22-97-57 Black – 22-97-32 Green – 22-97-xx UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Black – 325370 (500’ reel) Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Green – 325379 (500’ reel) Black – 325573 (2,500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) Green – 325580 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG Color Coded Red and Black Green for ground cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Electrical Service Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|1” – A52BA12 2” – A52CA12
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Certain Teed
|1” – 27213 1 ½” – 27413 2” – 27513 3” – 27713 4” – 27913
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|1” – 511010 – 10’ or 511020 – 20’ 1 ½” – 511510 – 10’ or 511520 – 20’ 2” – 512010 – 10’ or 512020 – 20’ 3” – 513010 – 10’ or 513020– 20’ 4” – 514010 – 10’ or 515020 – 20’
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Prime Conduit
|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length)
|5/26/09
|
|-
|
|Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe
|2” – 502010U – 10’ or 502020U – 20’ 3” – 503010U – 10’ or 503020U – 20’ 4” – 504010U – 10’ or 504020U – 20’
|4/7/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|
Schedule 40 PVC
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 6141625  2” – 6141628 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power:(Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 5133820 / 5233930 '''90º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133825 / 5233825  2” – 5133828 / 5233828 '''45º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133765 / 5233765  2” – 5133768 / 5233768 '''30º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133745 / 5233745  2” – 5133748 / 5233748
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 610002  2” – 610005 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 611392 / 611142 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611002 / 611058  2” – 611005 / 611061 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611016 / 611071  2” – 611019 / 611074 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611030 / 611085  2” – 611033 / 611088
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – EC20 / 077003  2” – EC35 / 077006 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 068767 / 068058 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068582 / 068422  2” – 068585 / 068425 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068602 / 068563  2” – 068605 / 068566 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068622 / EE2030  2” – 068625 / EE3530
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Plastic Trends / Royal Pipe Systems
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E010100  2” – E010200 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – E07530036 / E07930036 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – E018100 / E021100 2” – E018200 / E021200 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E019100 / E022100  2” – E019200 / E022200 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E020100 / E072100  2” – E020200 / E072200
|1/8/10
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Prime Conduit
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E940F  2” – E940J '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – UA9FL / UA9FLB '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB  2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB  2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB  2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB
|5/26/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40 PVC}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135GRY 3” – 3SDR135GRY
|3/28/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 all sizes Gray color Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED
|3/8/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with red stripes Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Ploywater
|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10
|
|-
|
|Cabletec
|AS 2.375 – 2” AS 3.500 – 3”
|8/2/01
|
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06
|
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 1-908353 – 2”
|10/5/10
|
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02
|
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” – 6202005
|1/9/06
|
|}

== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Purchased by Hubbell
|Connector MFG.Co.
|CMC SLK-112 I
|1/11/01
|
|rowspan="3"|6061-T6 aluminum Provide rubber boot cover – black plastisol
|-
|
|Durham Company
|9205159
|8/22/13
|
|-
|
|Fargo Mfg. Company, Inc subsidiary of Hubbell Inc.
|Fargo GO-32
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Polaris
|SLCS4A-4P
|9/21/07
|
|Coated w/ allen head screw – does not need rubber boot
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal Industries purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 20 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line non-fused 600 volt, 30 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 65 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line fused 600 volt, 8 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fuses ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bussmann Circuit Protection, Worldwide
|Limitron Type KTK8
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Ferraz Shawmut
|ATM-8
|1/25/02
|
|-
|
|Littelfuse
|KLK-8
|7/31/01
|
|}
{{PQLNote|600 volt, 8 amp}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Splice Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|'''Split-Bolt Connectors''' KS15 - #10 STR to #8 STR KS20 - #8 STR to #4 STR KS22 - #6 STR to #3 STR KS23 - #6 STR to #2 STR KS25 - #4 STR to #1/0 STR '''Copper Compression Tees''' YST4C4C - #4 STR to #4 STR
|5/5/03
|
|
|-
|
|NSI Industries Polaris Blue
|ISW-4 - #4 two-port in-line splice ITW-4 - #4 two port IPLW4-3 - #4 three port IPLW4-3 - #4 four port
|9/11/07
|
|Waterproof/submersible
|}

== Control Centers ==
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|CP3B91115PAOOP4
|4/8/11
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MEUG16AR-M100-OPK
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP16R-M2100-112C-AL-OPK
|2/3/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover with horn bypass and exposed meter}}

=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|Pending approval
|
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MET2-VLM-LTS-R
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-LT-PM
|2/17/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover and horn bypass with mounting collar for stand alone unit.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==

=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat No. C611300
|4/24/12
|
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611300 – ½” x 10’ Cat. No. 613400 – ¾” x 10’
|2/27/02
|
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5010
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Joslyn
|Cat No. J-8330
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Knight
|GRC 1210
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 10’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12 – ½” GRC34 – ¾”
|2/27/02
|
|-
|

|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” Part No. HDC34 – ¾”
|12/1/05
|
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type I Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001423TA (12” x 12” x 12”)
|1/11/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1212-12 – Box only SC30-1212-02 – Cover only SA33-1212-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB121212 – Box only CHC1212SL – Cover only PHA121212SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|121212PCB – Box only 1212PCC – Cover only 121212PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|

|New Basis
|PCB121212A04 – Box only PCC121212A04 – Cover only PCA121212A4009 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|12122001 – Box only 12124006– Cover only 12121003 w/ 12124006 “Street Lighting” – Assembly 80002052 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PC1212BA12 – Box only PC1212CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be ¾” thick (CDR is 1 ½” thick) Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Type II Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001429TA (11”x18”x12”)
|7/30/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1118-12 – Box only SC30-1118-02 – Cover only SA33-1118-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB111812 – Box only CHC1118SL – Cover only PHA111812SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|111812PCB – Box only 1118PCC – Cover only 111812PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB111812A04 – Box only PCC111812A04 – Cover only PCA111812A866 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|11182001 – Box only 11184007 – Cover only 11181617 – Assembly 80002033 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG1118BA12 – Box only PG1118CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be 1 ¾” to 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Lamps ==
=== High Pressure Sodium ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|General Electric
|Lucalox – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/ECO/NC – 14673 150 W – LU150/55/ECO/NC – 40390 250 W – LU250/ECO/NC – 14674 400 W – LU400/ECO/NC – 14675
|11/4/10
|
|-
|
|Phillips
|100 W – C100S54/ALTO/NC – 14740-5 150 W – C150S55/ALTO/NC – 14741-3 250 W – C250S50/ALTO/NC – 14742-1 400 W – C400S51/ALTO/NC – 14743-9
|10/14/11
|
|-
|
|Sylvania
|Lumalux PLUS/ECO – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/PLUS/ECO – 67559 150 W – LU150/55/PLUS/ECO – 67494 250 W – LU250/PLUS/ECO – 67572 400 W – LU400/PLUS/ECO – 67312
|3/26/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Clear lamp Mogul base ECO/ALTO = Low Mercury NC = Non Cycling 30,000+ Hour Average Life}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Luminaires ==
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 150:AE7361-70fg3.ies 250 & 400: AEL12963.ies
|American Electric Lighting – Acuity Brands
|31515SCAMT2R3FGM2NRHPAR8663 – 150W HPS 32525SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 250W HPS 32540SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 400W HPS
|4/28/05 4/15/05
|
|-
|Photometric Curves 150: GE7285.ies 250 & 400: GE1002.ies or GE7323.ies
|General Electric
|M2AC15S0A1GMC31347 – 150W HPS MDCA25S0A12FMC31 – 250W HPS MDCA40S0A12FMC31 – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|-
|150 & 250: HP03116.ies 400: HP03065.ies
|Hubbell
|RMCD15S38031125F0M53-150W RMCD25S38031125F0M53-250W RLCD40S38031125F0M53-400 W
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2-Bolt slip fitter connection for 150 W fixtures 4-Bolt slip fitter connection large housing for 250 W and 400 W fixtures Multi-Tap Ballast Plug-In “Protected” starter Aluminum wildlife guard NO PHOTOCELL}}

=== Highway Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curve 400W: 452580.ies
|General Electric
|RPFT40S0A1GLN4GR – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Residential Post Top ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 100 & 150 W: 42737
|Holophane
|PTU-10DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 100 W PTU-15DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 150 W
|2/14/03
|
|-
|Photometric Curves mpb15s3a – Type 3 mpb15sa – Type 5
|Sentry
|SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-150HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLSF –Type 5
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Multi-Tap Ballast}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Dark To Light (DTL)
|DP124-0.2-1821
|3/27/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120Volt, Turn on at 0.2 Fc Silicon Chip}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # B84165-001 – Type OP301 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B84165-002 – Type OP301 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-001 – Type OP302 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B84165-003 – Type OP303 w/twin single member 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-005 – w/twin 8’ truss arms – 10/04 Rev 2 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-71 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-72 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-73 – Type OP303 w/Rev 2 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP303 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 and KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.188” Wall Thickness Cable hook at top of pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # 84165-004 – Type OP401 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # 84165-005 – Type OP401 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-002 – Type OP402 w/single 10’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-003 – Type OP402 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-004 – Type OP402 w/single 15’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # 80061-001 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ & 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-002 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-003 Type OP403 w/twin 15’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-004 Type OP403 w/twin 10’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-74 – Type OP401w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-75 – Type OP402 w/Rev 3 Dwg # KS-76 – Type OP403 w/Rev 3 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP401 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP402 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-88 – Type OP403 w/Rev 1 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 & KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.219” Wall Thickness}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Information Contained on Pole Drawings.
|9/3/03
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''Arms:''' Dwg # KS-77 – 6’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-78 – 8’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-79 – 8’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-80 – 10’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-81 – 12’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-82 – 15’ Truss – 5/14/03 '''Arm Attachment:''' Dwg # KS-83 – Single w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-84 – Truss w/Rev 1
|11/29/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Supply end cap on lower truss member. Labeled with identification tag.}}

=== Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg # A66338 w/Rev # 10 – 4/08
|4/23/08
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg # KS-70 – Type OP14 w/Rev 5 Dwg # KS-85 – Handhole w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-89 – ID Detail
|4/23/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening. Handhole should be smooth and free of burrs. Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.156” Wall Thickness}}

== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|T112-0363 – R OP14 T112-0748 – T1 OP301/302/303 T112-02930101 – F1 OP401/402 T112-02940101 – F2 OP403
|2/20/06
|
|-
|
|Dixie
|D-1202-0029-A – R OP14 D-1202-0465-A – T1 OP301/302/303 D-1202-0031-A – F1 OP401/402 D-1202-0032-A – F2 OP403
|4/10/13
|
|-
|
|Earth Contact Products
|LPS-66T-048-12 – R OP14 LPS-66T-060-12 – T1 OP301/302/303 LPS-86T-60A-14 – F1 OP401/402 LPS-86T-60B-14 – F2 OP403
|10/15/12
|
|-
|
|JH Botts, Inc.
|Dwg # JHBOPK-1 w/Rev A
|8/20/03
|
|-
|
|Pelco
|SK-1094-1 Rev C – R OP14 SK-1109-1 Rev B – T1 OP301/302/303 SK-1108-1 Rev B – F1 OP401/402 SK-1095-1 Rev E – F2 OP403
|7/19/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Manufacturer and foundation identification stenciled on base plate with ¼” to ½” lettering.}}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2013-10-02T17:46:43Z

Mike Ross: /* Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==

=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Precision Form, Inc.
|PFI-200-1A Breakaway Couplings
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Hapco
|AASHTO No. TB6-9”–10 ½” to 12½” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79402 – 4/4/98 AASHTO No. TB5-9”–14 ½” to 15¼” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79236 – 1/4/00
|8/15/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Valmont
|CS-300 – Up to 12” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB6-9 Dwg # KS-90 – 5/14/03 CS-370 – 14 ½” to 15” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB5-9 Dwg # KS-91 w/ Rev 1
|6/20/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==
=== Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 060062C
|8/21/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|Bare-CU-SD-6-7SOL
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Soft Drawn Bare Solid Copper #6 AWG}}

=== Distribution Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Black – 112-3801 Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
|
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co. 9/5/2001
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 070101 UL file # E14656
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co.
|Red – 22-97-57 Black – 22-97-32 Green – 22-97-xx UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Black – 325370 (500’ reel) Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Green – 325379 (500’ reel) Black – 325573 (2,500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) Green – 325580 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG Color Coded Red and Black Green for ground cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Electrical Service Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|1” – A52BA12 2” – A52CA12
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Certain Teed
|1” – 27213 1 ½” – 27413 2” – 27513 3” – 27713 4” – 27913
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|1” – 511010 – 10’ or 511020 – 20’ 1 ½” – 511510 – 10’ or 511520 – 20’ 2” – 512010 – 10’ or 512020 – 20’ 3” – 513010 – 10’ or 513020– 20’ 4” – 514010 – 10’ or 515020 – 20’
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Prime Conduit
|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length)
|5/26/09
|
|-
|
|Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe
|2” – 502010U – 10’ or 502020U – 20’ 3” – 503010U – 10’ or 503020U – 20’ 4” – 504010U – 10’ or 504020U – 20’
|4/7/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|
Schedule 40 PVC
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 6141625  2” – 6141628 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power:(Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 5133820 / 5233930 '''90º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133825 / 5233825  2” – 5133828 / 5233828 '''45º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133765 / 5233765  2” – 5133768 / 5233768 '''30º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133745 / 5233745  2” – 5133748 / 5233748
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 610002  2” – 610005 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 611392 / 611142 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611002 / 611058  2” – 611005 / 611061 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611016 / 611071  2” – 611019 / 611074 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611030 / 611085  2” – 611033 / 611088
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – EC20 / 077003  2” – EC35 / 077006 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 068767 / 068058 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068582 / 068422  2” – 068585 / 068425 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068602 / 068563  2” – 068605 / 068566 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068622 / EE2030  2” – 068625 / EE3530
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Plastic Trends / Royal Pipe Systems
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E010100  2” – E010200 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – E07530036 / E07930036 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – E018100 / E021100 2” – E018200 / E021200 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E019100 / E022100  2” – E019200 / E022200 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E020100 / E072100  2” – E020200 / E072200
|1/8/10
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Prime Conduit
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E940F  2” – E940J '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – UA9FL / UA9FLB '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB  2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB  2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB  2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB
|5/26/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40 PVC}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135GRY 3” – 3SDR135GRY
|3/28/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 all sizes Gray color Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED
|3/8/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with red stripes Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Ploywater
|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10
|
|-
|
|Cabletec
|AS 2.375 – 2” AS 3.500 – 3”
|8/2/01
|
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06
|
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 1-908353 – 2”
|10/5/10
|
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02
|
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” – 6202005
|1/9/06
|
|}

== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Purchased by Hubbell
|Connector MFG.Co.
|CMC SLK-112 I
|1/11/01
|
|rowspan="3"|6061-T6 aluminum Provide rubber boot cover – black plastisol
|-
|
|Durham Company
|9205159
|8/22/13
|
|-
|
|Fargo Mfg. Company, Inc subsidiary of Hubbell Inc.
|Fargo GO-32
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Polaris
|SLCS4A-4P
|9/21/07
|
|Coated w/ allen head screw – does not need rubber boot
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal Industries purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 20 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line non-fused 600 volt, 30 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 65 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line fused 600 volt, 8 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fuses ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bussmann Circuit Protection, Worldwide
|Limitron Type KTK8
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Ferraz Shawmut
|ATM-8
|1/25/02
|
|-
|
|Littelfuse
|KLK-8
|7/31/01
|
|}
{{PQLNote|600 volt, 8 amp}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Splice Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|'''Split-Bolt Connectors''' KS15 - #10 STR to #8 STR KS20 - #8 STR to #4 STR KS22 - #6 STR to #3 STR KS23 - #6 STR to #2 STR KS25 - #4 STR to #1/0 STR '''Copper Compression Tees''' YST4C4C - #4 STR to #4 STR
|5/5/03
|
|
|-
|
|NSI Industries Polaris Blue
|ISW-4 - #4 two-port in-line splice ITW-4 - #4 two port IPLW4-3 - #4 three port IPLW4-3 - #4 four port
|9/11/07
|
|Waterproof/submersible
|}

== Control Centers ==
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|CP3B91115PAOOP4
|4/8/11
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MEUG16AR-M100-OPK
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP16R-M2100-112C-AL-OPK
|2/3/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover with horn bypass and exposed meter}}

=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|Pending approval
|
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MET2-VLM-LTS-R
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-LT-PM
|2/17/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover and horn bypass with mounting collar for stand alone unit.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==

=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat No. C611300
|4/24/12
|
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611300 – ½” x 10’ Cat. No. 613400 – ¾” x 10’
|2/27/02
|
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5010
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Joslyn
|Cat No. J-8330
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Knight
|GRC 1210
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 10’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12 – ½” GRC34 – ¾”
|2/27/02
|
|-
|

|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” Part No. HDC34 – ¾”
|12/1/05
|
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type I Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001423TA (12” x 12” x 12”)
|1/11/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1212-12 – Box only SC30-1212-02 – Cover only SA33-1212-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB121212 – Box only CHC1212SL – Cover only PHA121212SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|121212PCB – Box only 1212PCC – Cover only 121212PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|

|New Basis
|PCB121212A04 – Box only PCC121212A04 – Cover only PCA121212A4009 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|12122001 – Box only 12124006– Cover only 12121003 w/ 12124006 “Street Lighting” – Assembly 80002052 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PC1212BA12 – Box only PC1212CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be ¾” thick (CDR is 1 ½” thick) Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Type II Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001429TA (11”x18”x12”)
|7/30/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1118-12 – Box only SC30-1118-02 – Cover only SA33-1118-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB111812 – Box only CHC1118SL – Cover only PHA111812SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|111812PCB – Box only 1118PCC – Cover only 111812PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB111812A04 – Box only PCC111812A04 – Cover only PCA111812A866 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|11182001 – Box only 11184007 – Cover only 11181617 – Assembly 80002033 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG1118BA12 – Box only PG1118CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be 1 ¾” to 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Lamps ==
=== High Pressure Sodium ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|General Electric
|Lucalox – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/ECO/NC – 14673 150 W – LU150/55/ECO/NC – 40390 250 W – LU250/ECO/NC – 14674 400 W – LU400/ECO/NC – 14675
|11/4/10
|
|-
|
|Phillips
|100 W – C100S54/ALTO/NC – 14740-5 150 W – C150S55/ALTO/NC – 14741-3 250 W – C250S50/ALTO/NC – 14742-1 400 W – C400S51/ALTO/NC – 14743-9
|10/14/11
|
|-
|
|Sylvania
|Lumalux PLUS/ECO – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/PLUS/ECO – 67559 150 W – LU150/55/PLUS/ECO – 67494 250 W – LU250/PLUS/ECO – 67572 400 W – LU400/PLUS/ECO – 67312
|3/26/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Clear lamp Mogul base ECO/ALTO = Low Mercury NC = Non Cycling 30,000+ Hour Average Life}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Luminaires ==
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 150:AE7361-70fg3.ies 250 & 400: AEL12963.ies
|American Electric Lighting – Acuity Brands
|31515SCAMT2R3FGM2NRHPAR8663 – 150W HPS 32525SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 250W HPS 32540SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 400W HPS
|4/28/05 4/15/05
|
|-
|Photometric Curves 150: GE7285.ies 250 & 400: GE1002.ies or GE7323.ies
|General Electric
|M2AC15S0A1GMC31347 – 150W HPS MDCA25S0A12FMC31 – 250W HPS MDCA40S0A12FMC31 – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|-
|150 & 250: HP03116.ies 400: HP03065.ies
|Hubbell
|RMCD15S38031125F0M53-150W RMCD25S38031125F0M53-250W RLCD40S38031125F0M53-400 W
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2-Bolt slip fitter connection for 150 W fixtures 4-Bolt slip fitter connection large housing for 250 W and 400 W fixtures Multi-Tap Ballast Plug-In “Protected” starter Aluminum wildlife guard NO PHOTOCELL}}

=== Highway Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curve 400W: 452580.ies
|General Electric
|RPFT40S0A1GLN4GR – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Residential Post Top ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 100 & 150 W: 42737
|Holophane
|PTU-10DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 100 W PTU-15DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 150 W
|2/14/03
|
|-
|Photometric Curves mpb15s3a – Type 3 mpb15sa – Type 5
|Sentry
|SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-150HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLSF –Type 5
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Multi-Tap Ballast}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Dark To Light (DTL)
|DP124-0.2-1821
|3/27/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120Volt, Turn on at 0.2 Fc Silicon Chip}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # B84165-001 – Type OP301 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B84165-002 – Type OP301 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-001 – Type OP302 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B84165-003 – Type OP303 w/twin single member 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-005 – w/twin 8’ truss arms – 10/04 Rev 2 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-71 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-72 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-73 – Type OP303 w/Rev 2 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP303 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 and KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.188” Wall Thickness Cable hook at top of pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # 84165-004 – Type OP401 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # 84165-005 – Type OP401 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-002 – Type OP402 w/single 10’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-003 – Type OP402 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-004 – Type OP402 w/single 15’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # 80061-001 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ & 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-002 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-003 Type OP403 w/twin 15’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-004 Type OP403 w/twin 10’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-74 – Type OP401w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-75 – Type OP402 w/Rev 3 Dwg # KS-76 – Type OP403 w/Rev 3 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP401 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP402 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-88 – Type OP403 w/Rev 1 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 & KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.219” Wall Thickness}}

=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Information Contained on Pole Drawings.
|9/3/03
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''Arms:''' Dwg # KS-77 – 6’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-78 – 8’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-79 – 8’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-80 – 10’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-81 – 12’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-82 – 15’ Truss – 5/14/03 '''Arm Attachment:''' Dwg # KS-83 – Single w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-84 – Truss w/Rev 1
|11/29/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Supply end cap on lower truss member. Labeled with identification tag.}}

=== Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg # A66338 w/Rev # 10 – 4/08
|4/23/08
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg # KS-70 – Type OP14 w/Rev 5 Dwg # KS-85 – Handhole w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-89 – ID Detail
|4/23/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening. Handhole should be smooth and free of burrs. Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.156” Wall Thickness}}

== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|T112-0363 – R OP14 T112-0748 – T1 OP301/302/303 T112-02930101 – F1 OP401/402 T112-02940101 – F2 OP403
|2/20/06
|
|-
|
|Dixie
|D-1202-0029-A – R OP14 D-1202-0465-A – T1 OP301/302/303 D-1202-0031-A – F1 OP401/402 D-1202-0032-A – F2 OP403
|4/10/13
|
|-
|
|Earth Contact Products
|LPS-66T-048-12 – R OP14 LPS-66T-060-12 – T1 OP301/302/303 LPS-86T-60A-14 – F1 OP401/402 LPS-86T-60B-14 – F2 OP403
|10/15/12
|
|-
|
|JH Botts, Inc.
|Dwg # JHBOPK-1 w/Rev A
|8/20/03
|
|-
|
|Pelco
|SK-1094-1 Rev C – R OP14 SK-1109-1 Rev B – T1 OP301/302/303 SK-1108-1 Rev B – F1 OP401/402 SK-1095-1 Rev E – F2 OP403
|7/19/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Manufacturer and foundation identification stenciled on base plate with ¼” to ½” lettering.}}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2013-10-02T17:46:31Z

Mike Ross: /* System Photocell */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==

=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Precision Form, Inc.
|PFI-200-1A Breakaway Couplings
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Hapco
|AASHTO No. TB6-9”–10 ½” to 12½” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79402 – 4/4/98 AASHTO No. TB5-9”–14 ½” to 15¼” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79236 – 1/4/00
|8/15/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Valmont
|CS-300 – Up to 12” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB6-9 Dwg # KS-90 – 5/14/03 CS-370 – 14 ½” to 15” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB5-9 Dwg # KS-91 w/ Rev 1
|6/20/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==
=== Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 060062C
|8/21/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|Bare-CU-SD-6-7SOL
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Soft Drawn Bare Solid Copper #6 AWG}}

=== Distribution Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Black – 112-3801 Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
|
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co. 9/5/2001
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 070101 UL file # E14656
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co.
|Red – 22-97-57 Black – 22-97-32 Green – 22-97-xx UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Black – 325370 (500’ reel) Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Green – 325379 (500’ reel) Black – 325573 (2,500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) Green – 325580 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG Color Coded Red and Black Green for ground cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Electrical Service Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|1” – A52BA12 2” – A52CA12
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Certain Teed
|1” – 27213 1 ½” – 27413 2” – 27513 3” – 27713 4” – 27913
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|1” – 511010 – 10’ or 511020 – 20’ 1 ½” – 511510 – 10’ or 511520 – 20’ 2” – 512010 – 10’ or 512020 – 20’ 3” – 513010 – 10’ or 513020– 20’ 4” – 514010 – 10’ or 515020 – 20’
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Prime Conduit
|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length)
|5/26/09
|
|-
|
|Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe
|2” – 502010U – 10’ or 502020U – 20’ 3” – 503010U – 10’ or 503020U – 20’ 4” – 504010U – 10’ or 504020U – 20’
|4/7/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|
Schedule 40 PVC
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 6141625  2” – 6141628 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power:(Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 5133820 / 5233930 '''90º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133825 / 5233825  2” – 5133828 / 5233828 '''45º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133765 / 5233765  2” – 5133768 / 5233768 '''30º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133745 / 5233745  2” – 5133748 / 5233748
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 610002  2” – 610005 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 611392 / 611142 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611002 / 611058  2” – 611005 / 611061 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611016 / 611071  2” – 611019 / 611074 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611030 / 611085  2” – 611033 / 611088
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – EC20 / 077003  2” – EC35 / 077006 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 068767 / 068058 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068582 / 068422  2” – 068585 / 068425 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068602 / 068563  2” – 068605 / 068566 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068622 / EE2030  2” – 068625 / EE3530
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Plastic Trends / Royal Pipe Systems
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E010100  2” – E010200 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – E07530036 / E07930036 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – E018100 / E021100 2” – E018200 / E021200 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E019100 / E022100  2” – E019200 / E022200 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E020100 / E072100  2” – E020200 / E072200
|1/8/10
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Prime Conduit
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E940F  2” – E940J '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – UA9FL / UA9FLB '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB  2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB  2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB  2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB
|5/26/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40 PVC}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135GRY 3” – 3SDR135GRY
|3/28/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 all sizes Gray color Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED
|3/8/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with red stripes Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Ploywater
|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10
|
|-
|
|Cabletec
|AS 2.375 – 2” AS 3.500 – 3”
|8/2/01
|
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06
|
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 1-908353 – 2”
|10/5/10
|
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02
|
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” – 6202005
|1/9/06
|
|}

== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Purchased by Hubbell
|Connector MFG.Co.
|CMC SLK-112 I
|1/11/01
|
|rowspan="3"|6061-T6 aluminum Provide rubber boot cover – black plastisol
|-
|
|Durham Company
|9205159
|8/22/13
|
|-
|
|Fargo Mfg. Company, Inc subsidiary of Hubbell Inc.
|Fargo GO-32
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Polaris
|SLCS4A-4P
|9/21/07
|
|Coated w/ allen head screw – does not need rubber boot
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal Industries purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 20 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line non-fused 600 volt, 30 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 65 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line fused 600 volt, 8 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fuses ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bussmann Circuit Protection, Worldwide
|Limitron Type KTK8
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Ferraz Shawmut
|ATM-8
|1/25/02
|
|-
|
|Littelfuse
|KLK-8
|7/31/01
|
|}
{{PQLNote|600 volt, 8 amp}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Splice Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|'''Split-Bolt Connectors''' KS15 - #10 STR to #8 STR KS20 - #8 STR to #4 STR KS22 - #6 STR to #3 STR KS23 - #6 STR to #2 STR KS25 - #4 STR to #1/0 STR '''Copper Compression Tees''' YST4C4C - #4 STR to #4 STR
|5/5/03
|
|
|-
|
|NSI Industries Polaris Blue
|ISW-4 - #4 two-port in-line splice ITW-4 - #4 two port IPLW4-3 - #4 three port IPLW4-3 - #4 four port
|9/11/07
|
|Waterproof/submersible
|}

== Control Centers ==
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|CP3B91115PAOOP4
|4/8/11
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MEUG16AR-M100-OPK
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP16R-M2100-112C-AL-OPK
|2/3/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover with horn bypass and exposed meter}}

=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|Pending approval
|
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MET2-VLM-LTS-R
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-LT-PM
|2/17/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover and horn bypass with mounting collar for stand alone unit.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==

=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat No. C611300
|4/24/12
|
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611300 – ½” x 10’ Cat. No. 613400 – ¾” x 10’
|2/27/02
|
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5010
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Joslyn
|Cat No. J-8330
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Knight
|GRC 1210
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 10’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12 – ½” GRC34 – ¾”
|2/27/02
|
|-
|

|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” Part No. HDC34 – ¾”
|12/1/05
|
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type I Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001423TA (12” x 12” x 12”)
|1/11/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1212-12 – Box only SC30-1212-02 – Cover only SA33-1212-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB121212 – Box only CHC1212SL – Cover only PHA121212SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|121212PCB – Box only 1212PCC – Cover only 121212PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|

|New Basis
|PCB121212A04 – Box only PCC121212A04 – Cover only PCA121212A4009 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|12122001 – Box only 12124006– Cover only 12121003 w/ 12124006 “Street Lighting” – Assembly 80002052 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PC1212BA12 – Box only PC1212CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be ¾” thick (CDR is 1 ½” thick) Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Type II Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001429TA (11”x18”x12”)
|7/30/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1118-12 – Box only SC30-1118-02 – Cover only SA33-1118-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB111812 – Box only CHC1118SL – Cover only PHA111812SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|111812PCB – Box only 1118PCC – Cover only 111812PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB111812A04 – Box only PCC111812A04 – Cover only PCA111812A866 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|11182001 – Box only 11184007 – Cover only 11181617 – Assembly 80002033 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG1118BA12 – Box only PG1118CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be 1 ¾” to 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Lamps ==
=== High Pressure Sodium ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|General Electric
|Lucalox – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/ECO/NC – 14673 150 W – LU150/55/ECO/NC – 40390 250 W – LU250/ECO/NC – 14674 400 W – LU400/ECO/NC – 14675
|11/4/10
|
|-
|
|Phillips
|100 W – C100S54/ALTO/NC – 14740-5 150 W – C150S55/ALTO/NC – 14741-3 250 W – C250S50/ALTO/NC – 14742-1 400 W – C400S51/ALTO/NC – 14743-9
|10/14/11
|
|-
|
|Sylvania
|Lumalux PLUS/ECO – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/PLUS/ECO – 67559 150 W – LU150/55/PLUS/ECO – 67494 250 W – LU250/PLUS/ECO – 67572 400 W – LU400/PLUS/ECO – 67312
|3/26/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Clear lamp Mogul base ECO/ALTO = Low Mercury NC = Non Cycling 30,000+ Hour Average Life}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Luminaires ==
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 150:AE7361-70fg3.ies 250 & 400: AEL12963.ies
|American Electric Lighting – Acuity Brands
|31515SCAMT2R3FGM2NRHPAR8663 – 150W HPS 32525SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 250W HPS 32540SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 400W HPS
|4/28/05 4/15/05
|
|-
|Photometric Curves 150: GE7285.ies 250 & 400: GE1002.ies or GE7323.ies
|General Electric
|M2AC15S0A1GMC31347 – 150W HPS MDCA25S0A12FMC31 – 250W HPS MDCA40S0A12FMC31 – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|-
|150 & 250: HP03116.ies 400: HP03065.ies
|Hubbell
|RMCD15S38031125F0M53-150W RMCD25S38031125F0M53-250W RLCD40S38031125F0M53-400 W
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2-Bolt slip fitter connection for 150 W fixtures 4-Bolt slip fitter connection large housing for 250 W and 400 W fixtures Multi-Tap Ballast Plug-In “Protected” starter Aluminum wildlife guard NO PHOTOCELL}}

=== Highway Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curve 400W: 452580.ies
|General Electric
|RPFT40S0A1GLN4GR – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Residential Post Top ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 100 & 150 W: 42737
|Holophane
|PTU-10DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 100 W PTU-15DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 150 W
|2/14/03
|
|-
|Photometric Curves mpb15s3a – Type 3 mpb15sa – Type 5
|Sentry
|SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-150HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLSF –Type 5
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Multi-Tap Ballast}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Dark To Light (DTL)
|DP124-0.2-1821
|3/27/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120Volt, Turn on at 0.2 Fc Silicon Chip}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # B84165-001 – Type OP301 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B84165-002 – Type OP301 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-001 – Type OP302 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B84165-003 – Type OP303 w/twin single member 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-005 – w/twin 8’ truss arms – 10/04 Rev 2 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-71 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-72 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-73 – Type OP303 w/Rev 2 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP303 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 and KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.188” Wall Thickness Cable hook at top of pole}}

=== Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # 84165-004 – Type OP401 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # 84165-005 – Type OP401 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-002 – Type OP402 w/single 10’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-003 – Type OP402 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-004 – Type OP402 w/single 15’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # 80061-001 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ & 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-002 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-003 Type OP403 w/twin 15’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-004 Type OP403 w/twin 10’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-74 – Type OP401w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-75 – Type OP402 w/Rev 3 Dwg # KS-76 – Type OP403 w/Rev 3 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP401 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP402 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-88 – Type OP403 w/Rev 1 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 & KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.219” Wall Thickness}}

=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Information Contained on Pole Drawings.
|9/3/03
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''Arms:''' Dwg # KS-77 – 6’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-78 – 8’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-79 – 8’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-80 – 10’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-81 – 12’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-82 – 15’ Truss – 5/14/03 '''Arm Attachment:''' Dwg # KS-83 – Single w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-84 – Truss w/Rev 1
|11/29/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Supply end cap on lower truss member. Labeled with identification tag.}}

=== Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg # A66338 w/Rev # 10 – 4/08
|4/23/08
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg # KS-70 – Type OP14 w/Rev 5 Dwg # KS-85 – Handhole w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-89 – ID Detail
|4/23/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening. Handhole should be smooth and free of burrs. Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.156” Wall Thickness}}

== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|T112-0363 – R OP14 T112-0748 – T1 OP301/302/303 T112-02930101 – F1 OP401/402 T112-02940101 – F2 OP403
|2/20/06
|
|-
|
|Dixie
|D-1202-0029-A – R OP14 D-1202-0465-A – T1 OP301/302/303 D-1202-0031-A – F1 OP401/402 D-1202-0032-A – F2 OP403
|4/10/13
|
|-
|
|Earth Contact Products
|LPS-66T-048-12 – R OP14 LPS-66T-060-12 – T1 OP301/302/303 LPS-86T-60A-14 – F1 OP401/402 LPS-86T-60B-14 – F2 OP403
|10/15/12
|
|-
|
|JH Botts, Inc.
|Dwg # JHBOPK-1 w/Rev A
|8/20/03
|
|-
|
|Pelco
|SK-1094-1 Rev C – R OP14 SK-1109-1 Rev B – T1 OP301/302/303 SK-1108-1 Rev B – F1 OP401/402 SK-1095-1 Rev E – F2 OP403
|7/19/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Manufacturer and foundation identification stenciled on base plate with ¼” to ½” lettering.}}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2013-10-02T17:46:22Z

Mike Ross: /* Highway Luminaire */

[[Preapproved Materials|Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page]]

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}
<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==

=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Precision Form, Inc.
|PFI-200-1A Breakaway Couplings
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Hapco
|AASHTO No. TB6-9”–10 ½” to 12½” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79402 – 4/4/98 AASHTO No. TB5-9”–14 ½” to 15¼” Bolt Circle Dwg # A79236 – 1/4/00
|8/15/03
|
|-
|
|Akron Foundries, Inc. / Valmont
|CS-300 – Up to 12” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB6-9 Dwg # KS-90 – 5/14/03 CS-370 – 14 ½” to 15” Bolt Circle AASHTO No. TB5-9 Dwg # KS-91 w/ Rev 1
|6/20/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==
=== Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 060062C
|8/21/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire
|Bare No. 6 AWG
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|Bare-CU-SD-6-7SOL
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Soft Drawn Bare Solid Copper #6 AWG}}

=== Distribution Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|Black – 112-3801 Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E123774
|8/1/03
|
|-
|Purchased by Southwire Co. 9/5/2001
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 070101 UL file # E14656
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co.
|Red – 22-97-57 Black – 22-97-32 Green – 22-97-xx UL file # E23919
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|United Copper Industries
|Black – 325370 (500’ reel) Red – 325372 (500’ reel) Green – 325379 (500’ reel) Black – 325573 (2,500’ reel) Red – 325574 (2,500’ reel) Green – 325580 (2,500’ reel) UL file # E194031-A
|5/26/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper THHN/THWN #10 AWG Color Coded Red and Black Green for ground cable}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Electrical Service Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Aetna Insulated Wire Co.
|UL file # E63541
|2/21/05
|
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|Product Number 04USE11 – 500’ UL file #E319493
|1/30/12
|
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|UL file # E11098
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Draka Cableteq
|Product Number 388932
|7/8/09
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|UL file # E174428
|8/1/03
|
|-
|
|Essex Electrical Products
|Product Number 0800410 UL file # E11134
|2/1/01
|
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|0407-RHW/USE-BK UL file # E207249
|11/24/03
|
|-
|
|Senator / Southwire Co
|11-32-72 UL file # E32071
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|UL file # E105667
|5/7/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Black insulation Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|1” – A52BA12 2” – A52CA12
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Certain Teed
|1” – 27213 1 ½” – 27413 2” – 27513 3” – 27713 4” – 27913
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|1” – 511010 – 10’ or 511020 – 20’ 1 ½” – 511510 – 10’ or 511520 – 20’ 2” – 512010 – 10’ or 512020 – 20’ 3” – 513010 – 10’ or 513020– 20’ 4” – 514010 – 10’ or 515020 – 20’
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Prime Conduit
|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length)
|5/26/09
|
|-
|
|Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe
|2” – 502010U – 10’ or 502020U – 20’ 3” – 503010U – 10’ or 503020U – 20’ 4” – 504010U – 10’ or 504020U – 20’
|4/7/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|
Schedule 40 PVC
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Cantex
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 6141625  2” – 6141628 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power:(Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 5133820 / 5233930 '''90º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133825 / 5233825  2” – 5133828 / 5233828 '''45º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133765 / 5233765  2” – 5133768 / 5233768 '''30º Elbows:(Plain End/Belled End)'''  1” – 5133745 / 5233745  2” – 5133748 / 5233748
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Heritage Plastics
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – 610002  2” – 610005 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 611392 / 611142 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611002 / 611058  2” – 611005 / 611061 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611016 / 611071  2” – 611019 / 611074 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 611030 / 611085  2” – 611033 / 611088
|7/24/12
|
|-
|
|IPEX / PW Eagle
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – EC20 / 077003  2” – EC35 / 077006 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – 068767 / 068058 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068582 / 068422  2” – 068585 / 068425 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068602 / 068563  2” – 068605 / 068566 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – 068622 / EE2030  2” – 068625 / EE3530
|12/22/05
|
|-
|
|Plastic Trends / Royal Pipe Systems
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E010100  2” – E010200 '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – E07530036 / E07930036 '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – E018100 / E021100 2” – E018200 / E021200 '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E019100 / E022100  2” – E019200 / E022200 '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – E020100 / E072100  2” – E020200 / E072200
|1/8/10
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|Prime Conduit
|'''Standard Couplings:'''  1” – E940F  2” – E940J '''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  3” – UA9FL / UA9FLB '''90º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB  2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB '''45º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB  2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB '''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)'''  1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB  2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB
|5/26/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40 PVC}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135GRY 3” – 3SDR135GRY
|3/28/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 all sizes Gray color Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Dura-Line now owns Arnco, Boreflex, Carlon and Lamson Pipe
|Dura-Line
|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED
|3/8/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with red stripes Smooth outside wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|American Ploywater
|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” - 6202005
|10/11/10
|
|-
|
|Cabletec
|AS 2.375 – 2” AS 3.500 – 3”
|8/2/01
|
|-
|
|Central Plastics Company
|Electrofusion Couplings 2” IPS 575-0042 3” IPS 575-0043
|5/5/06
|
|-
|
|Dura-Line
|PushLock Couplings 1-908353 – 2”
|10/5/10
|
|-
|
|Tyco Electronics / Jackmoon
|Moon-Link Transparent Duct Coupling 2” – 20TC238SP 3” – 30TC350SP
|12/23/02
|
|-
|
|Unitex
|Pro-Poly CA Adhesive Use only with Cantex Sch 40 PVC Longline Couplings: 2” – 6202000 3” – 6202005
|1/9/06
|
|}

== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Purchased by Hubbell
|Connector MFG.Co.
|CMC SLK-112 I
|1/11/01
|
|rowspan="3"|6061-T6 aluminum Provide rubber boot cover – black plastisol
|-
|
|Durham Company
|9205159
|8/22/13
|
|-
|
|Fargo Mfg. Company, Inc subsidiary of Hubbell Inc.
|Fargo GO-32
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Polaris
|SLCS4A-4P
|9/21/07
|
|Coated w/ allen head screw – does not need rubber boot
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal Industries purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 20 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line non-fused 600 volt, 30 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fused Fuse Holders ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Ideal purchased Buchanan
|Ideal Industries / Buchanan / Elastimold
|Style 65 U Breakaway
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Single pole in-line fused 600 volt, 8 amp Copper #10 AWG conductor size}}

=== Fuses ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bussmann Circuit Protection, Worldwide
|Limitron Type KTK8
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Ferraz Shawmut
|ATM-8
|1/25/02
|
|-
|
|Littelfuse
|KLK-8
|7/31/01
|
|}
{{PQLNote|600 volt, 8 amp}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Splice Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|'''Split-Bolt Connectors''' KS15 - #10 STR to #8 STR KS20 - #8 STR to #4 STR KS22 - #6 STR to #3 STR KS23 - #6 STR to #2 STR KS25 - #4 STR to #1/0 STR '''Copper Compression Tees''' YST4C4C - #4 STR to #4 STR
|5/5/03
|
|
|-
|
|NSI Industries Polaris Blue
|ISW-4 - #4 two-port in-line splice ITW-4 - #4 two port IPLW4-3 - #4 three port IPLW4-3 - #4 four port
|9/11/07
|
|Waterproof/submersible
|}

== Control Centers ==
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|CP3B91115PAOOP4
|4/8/11
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MEUG16AR-M100-OPK
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP16R-M2100-112C-AL-OPK
|2/3/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover with horn bypass and exposed meter}}

=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Milbank
|Pending approval
|
|
|-
|
|Myers Electric Products, Inc.
|MET2-VLM-LTS-R
|7/24/12
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers 12/10/12
|Pacific Utility Products
|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-LT-PM
|2/17/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Ringless meter cover and horn bypass with mounting collar for stand alone unit.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==

=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Chance/Hubbell
|Cat No. C611300
|4/24/12
|
|-
|
|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Cat. No. 611300 – ½” x 10’ Cat. No. 613400 – ¾” x 10’
|2/27/02
|
|-
|
|ITTBlackburn
|Cat. No. 5010
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Joslyn
|Cat No. J-8330
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Knight
|GRC 1210
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|½” x 10’-0” long Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Burndy
|GRC 12 – ½” GRC34 – ¾”
|2/27/02
|
|-
|

|Erico Inc. / Eritech
|Part No. HDC12 – ½” Part No. HDC34 – ¾”
|12/1/05
|
|-
|
|ITT Blackburn
|Type JAB-12H
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type I Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001423TA (12” x 12” x 12”)
|1/11/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1212-12 – Box only SC30-1212-02 – Cover only SA33-1212-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB121212 – Box only CHC1212SL – Cover only PHA121212SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|121212PCB – Box only 1212PCC – Cover only 121212PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|

|New Basis
|PCB121212A04 – Box only PCC121212A04 – Cover only PCA121212A4009 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|12122001 – Box only 12124006– Cover only 12121003 w/ 12124006 “Street Lighting” – Assembly 80002052 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PC1212BA12 – Box only PC1212CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be ¾” thick (CDR is 1 ½” thick) Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Type II Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Armorcast
|A6001429TA (11”x18”x12”)
|7/30/01
|
|-
|
|CDR
|SB33-1118-12 – Box only SC30-1118-02 – Cover only SA33-1118-12 – Assembly
|5/19/95
|
|-
|
|Highline
|PHB111812 – Box only CHC1118SL – Cover only PHA111812SL2 – Assembly
|3/3/11
|
|-
|
|Martin Enterprises
|111812PCB – Box only 1118PCC – Cover only 111812PC – Assembly
|10/17/11
|
|-
|
|New Basis
|PCB111812A04 – Box only PCC111812A04 – Cover only PCA111812A866 – Assembly
|2/26/02
|
|-
|Carson Series H boxes were purchased by Oldcastle
|Oldcastle
|11182001 – Box only 11184007 – Cover only 11181617 – Assembly 80002033 hex head bolts if separate
|8/29/13
|
|-
|
|Quazite
|PG1118BA12 – Box only PG1118CA0041 – Cover only
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Logo to read “Street Lighting” Cover to be 1 ¾” to 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Lamps ==
=== High Pressure Sodium ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|General Electric
|Lucalox – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/ECO/NC – 14673 150 W – LU150/55/ECO/NC – 40390 250 W – LU250/ECO/NC – 14674 400 W – LU400/ECO/NC – 14675
|11/4/10
|
|-
|
|Phillips
|100 W – C100S54/ALTO/NC – 14740-5 150 W – C150S55/ALTO/NC – 14741-3 250 W – C250S50/ALTO/NC – 14742-1 400 W – C400S51/ALTO/NC – 14743-9
|10/14/11
|
|-
|
|Sylvania
|Lumalux PLUS/ECO – HPS lamps 100 W – LU100/PLUS/ECO – 67559 150 W – LU150/55/PLUS/ECO – 67494 250 W – LU250/PLUS/ECO – 67572 400 W – LU400/PLUS/ECO – 67312
|3/26/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Clear lamp Mogul base ECO/ALTO = Low Mercury NC = Non Cycling 30,000+ Hour Average Life}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Luminaires ==
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 150:AE7361-70fg3.ies 250 & 400: AEL12963.ies
|American Electric Lighting – Acuity Brands
|31515SCAMT2R3FGM2NRHPAR8663 – 150W HPS 32525SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 250W HPS 32540SCAMT2R3FGNRHPAR8037 – 400W HPS
|4/28/05 4/15/05
|
|-
|Photometric Curves 150: GE7285.ies 250 & 400: GE1002.ies or GE7323.ies
|General Electric
|M2AC15S0A1GMC31347 – 150W HPS MDCA25S0A12FMC31 – 250W HPS MDCA40S0A12FMC31 – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|-
|150 & 250: HP03116.ies 400: HP03065.ies
|Hubbell
|RMCD15S38031125F0M53-150W RMCD25S38031125F0M53-250W RLCD40S38031125F0M53-400 W
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2-Bolt slip fitter connection for 150 W fixtures 4-Bolt slip fitter connection large housing for 250 W and 400 W fixtures Multi-Tap Ballast Plug-In “Protected” starter Aluminum wildlife guard NO PHOTOCELL}}

=== Highway Luminaire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curve 400W: 452580.ies
|General Electric
|RPFT40S0A1GLN4GR – 400W HPS
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Residential Post Top ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Photometric Curves 100 & 150 W: 42737
|Holophane
|PTU-10DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 100 W PTU-15DHP-MT-B-P3-B-P – 150 W
|2/14/03
|
|-
|Photometric Curves mpb15s3a – Type 3 mpb15sa – Type 5
|Sentry
|SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-150HPS-240MT-BLAF –Type 3 SLH-100HPS-240MT-BLSF –Type 5
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Multi-Tap Ballast}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Dark To Light (DTL)
|DP124-0.2-1821
|3/27/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120Volt, Turn on at 0.2 Fc Silicon Chip}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Poles 30' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # B84165-001 – Type OP301 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B84165-002 – Type OP301 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-001 – Type OP302 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B84165-003 – Type OP303 w/twin single member 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-005 – w/twin 8’ truss arms – 10/04 Rev 2 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''27’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-71 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-72 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-73 – Type OP303 w/Rev 2 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP301 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-86 – Type OP302 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP303 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 and KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.188” Wall Thickness Cable hook at top of pole}}

=== Aluminum Poles 40' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # 84165-004 – Type OP401 w/single 6’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # 84165-005 – Type OP401 w/single 8’ arm – 10/04 Rev 1 Dwg # B79636-002 – Type OP402 w/single 10’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-003 – Type OP402 w/single 12’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # B79636-004 – Type OP402 w/single 15’ arm – 10/04 Rev 2 Dwg # 80061-001 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ & 8’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-002 Type OP403 w/twin 12’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-003 Type OP403 w/twin 15’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 Dwg # 80061-004 Type OP403 w/twin 10’ arms – 10/04 Rev 3 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # B84166 9-3-03
|11/1/04
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''37’-6” Poles:''' Dwg # KS-74 – Type OP401w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-75 – Type OP402 w/Rev 3 Dwg # KS-76 – Type OP403 w/Rev 3 '''Handholes:''' Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP401 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-87 – Type OP402 w/Rev 2 Dwg # KS-88 – Type OP403 w/Rev 1 '''Identification Label:''' Dwg # KS-89 & KS-89A
|9/13/05
|
|}
{{PQLNote|J-hook at top of pole Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening or Hinged handhole option Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.219” Wall Thickness}}

=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Information Contained on Pole Drawings.
|9/3/03
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|'''Arms:''' Dwg # KS-77 – 6’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-78 – 8’ Single – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-79 – 8’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-80 – 10’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-81 – 12’ Truss – 5/14/03 Dwg # KS-82 – 15’ Truss – 5/14/03 '''Arm Attachment:''' Dwg # KS-83 – Single w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-84 – Truss w/Rev 1
|11/29/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Supply end cap on lower truss member. Labeled with identification tag.}}

=== Aluminum Poles 14' Mounting Heights ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg # A66338 w/Rev # 10 – 4/08
|4/23/08
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg # KS-70 – Type OP14 w/Rev 5 Dwg # KS-85 – Handhole w/Rev 1 Dwg # KS-89 – ID Detail
|4/23/08
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Handhole cover keeper chain attached to bottom of handhole opening. Handhole should be smooth and free of burrs. Grounding screw shaft installed parallel to pole shaft at back side of pole. Labeled with manufacturer identification tag. 0.156” Wall Thickness}}

== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|T112-0363 – R OP14 T112-0748 – T1 OP301/302/303 T112-02930101 – F1 OP401/402 T112-02940101 – F2 OP403
|2/20/06
|
|-
|
|Dixie
|D-1202-0029-A – R OP14 D-1202-0465-A – T1 OP301/302/303 D-1202-0031-A – F1 OP401/402 D-1202-0032-A – F2 OP403
|4/10/13
|
|-
|
|Earth Contact Products
|LPS-66T-048-12 – R OP14 LPS-66T-060-12 – T1 OP301/302/303 LPS-86T-60A-14 – F1 OP401/402 LPS-86T-60B-14 – F2 OP403
|10/15/12
|
|-
|
|JH Botts, Inc.
|Dwg # JHBOPK-1 w/Rev A
|8/20/03
|
|-
|
|Pelco
|SK-1094-1 Rev C – R OP14 SK-1109-1 Rev B – T1 OP301/302/303 SK-1108-1 Rev B – F1 OP401/402 SK-1095-1 Rev E – F2 OP403
|7/19/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Manufacturer and foundation identification stenciled on base plate with ¼” to ½” lettering.}}